Downlink reception and beam management

ABSTRACT

Wireless communications may comprise communications between a base station and a wireless device. The base station may send and/or schedule one or more transmissions to the wireless device that may overlap in time. The wireless device may receive and/or decode overlapping transmissions that are associated with a different indication and/or the wireless device may not receive at least one of overlapping transmissions that are associated with the same indications.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.17/039,168, filed Sep. 30, 2020, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/908,471, filed on Sep. 30, 2019, each ofwhich is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

A base station and a wireless device communicate via uplink and/ordownlink communications. The wireless device monitors for configurationcommunications from the base station.

SUMMARY

The following summary presents a simplified summary of certain features.The summary is not an extensive overview and is not intended to identifykey or critical elements.

Wireless communications may comprise communications between a basestation and a wireless device. The base station may send and/or scheduleone or more transmissions to the wireless device that may overlap intime. For example, the base station may send and/or schedule overlappingtransmissions across multiple devices and/or locations (e.g., antennas,transmission and reception points (TRPs), etc.). At least some wirelessdevices may have a capability to receive and/or decode some overlappingtransmissions (e.g., a processing capability; multiple antennas;configurations for multiple TRPs, states, and/or groups; etc.), but ifthe wireless device is not be able to determine whether such capabilityis sufficient for each instance of overlapping transmissions, thewireless device may drop at least one (e.g., some or all) of theoverlapping transmission(s). Rather than defaulting to drop overlappingtransmissions, a wireless device may determine whether to receive and/ordecode an overlapping transmission, based on an indication (e.g., aCORESET group index) associated with each transmission. For example, thewireless device may receive and/or decode overlapping transmissions thatare associated with a different CORESET group index (e.g., sent by thebase station from different TRPs). Conversely, the wireless device maydrop overlapping transmissions that are associated with the same CORESETgroup indexes (e.g., sent by the base station from the same TRP). Byusing CORESET group indexes (or other indications), a wireless devicemay efficiently receive and/or decode overlapping transmissions.

Wireless resources may be switched for wireless communications. Resourceswitching, such as bandwidth part (BWP) switching, may cause a wirelessdevice to delay using one or more new resources prior to a communicationbetween the wireless device and a base station for synchronizing the useof the new resource(s). The wireless device may be required to wait foran indication (e.g., a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE))to use the new resources. During this waiting, the wireless device maynot know which beams to monitor for receiving one or more messages fromthe base station. Rather than waiting or using an incorrect resource(e.g., TCI state, beam, etc.), the wireless device may apply a rule toselect a resource (e.g., TCI state, beam, etc.), among the TCI statesused in the previously active BWP, and use that resource to monitorcoresets in the new active BWP for the one or more messages from thebase station. By applying the rule to select a resource, and describedfurther herein, advantages may result from increased synchronizationbetween a base station and a wireless device for resource switching.

These and other features and advantages are described in greater detailbelow.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Some features are shown by way of example, and not by limitation, in theaccompanying drawings. In the drawings, like numerals reference similarelements.

FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B show example communication networks.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration.

FIG. 3 shows example of protocol layers.

FIG. 4A shows an example downlink data flow for a user planeconfiguration.

FIG. 4B shows an example format of a Medium Access Control (MAC)subheader in a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU).

FIG. 5A shows an example mapping for downlink channels.

FIG. 5B shows an example mapping for uplink channels.

FIG. 6 shows example radio resource control (RRC) states and RRC statetransitions.

FIG. 7 shows an example configuration of a frame.

FIG. 8 shows an example resource configuration of one or more carriers.

FIG. 9 shows an example configuration of bandwidth parts (BWPs).

FIG. 10A shows example carrier aggregation configurations based oncomponent carriers.

FIG. 10B shows example group of cells.

FIG. 11A shows an example mapping of one or more synchronizationsignal/physical broadcast channel (SS/PBCH) blocks.

FIG. 11B shows an example mapping of one or more channel stateinformation reference signals (CSI-RSs).

FIG. 12A shows examples of downlink beam management procedures.

FIG. 12B shows examples of uplink beam management procedures.

FIG. 13A shows an example four-step random access procedure.

FIG. 13B shows an example two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 13C shows an example two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 14A shows an example of control resource set (CORESET)configurations.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a control channel element to resourceelement group (CCE-to-REG) mapping.

FIG. 15A shows an example of communications between a wireless deviceand a base station.

FIG. 15B shows example elements of a computing device that may be usedto implement any of the various devices described herein.

FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D show examples of uplink anddownlink signal transmission.

FIG. 17 shows an example of beam management.

FIG. 18 shows an example of beam management.

FIG. 19 shows an example of beam management.

FIG. 20 shows an example of a beam management procedure.

FIG. 21 shows an example of sounding reference signal (SRS)configuration.

FIG. 22 shows an example of a sounding reference signal (SRS)configuration procedure.

FIG. 23 shows an example of overlapping downlink signal reception by awireless device.

FIG. 24 shows an example of an overlapping downlink signal receptionprocedure.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The accompanying drawings and descriptions provide examples. It is to beunderstood that the examples shown in the drawings and/or described arenon-exclusive, and that features shown and described may be practiced inother examples. Examples are provided for operation of wirelesscommunication systems, which may be used in the technical field ofmulticarrier communication systems. More particularly, the technologydisclosed herein may relate to downlink reception and beam management.

FIG. 1A shows an example communication network 100. The communicationnetwork 100 may comprise a mobile communication network). Thecommunication network 100 may comprise, for example, a public landmobile network (PLMN) operated/managed/run by a network operator. Thecommunication network 100 may comprise one or more of a core network(CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and/or a wireless device106. The communication network 100 may comprise, and/or a device withinthe communication network 100 may communicate with (e.g., via CN 102),one or more data networks (DN(s)) 108. The wireless device 106 maycommunicate with one or more DNs 108, such as public DNs (e.g., theInternet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. The wireless device106 may communicate with the one or more DNs 108 via the RAN 104 and/orvia the CN 102. The CN 102 may provide/configure the wireless device 106with one or more interfaces to the one or more DNs 108. As part of theinterface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connectionsbetween the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs 108,authenticate the wireless device 106, provide/configure chargingfunctionality, etc.

The wireless device 106 may communicate with the RAN 104 via radiocommunications over an air interface. The RAN 104 may communicate withthe CN 102 via various communications (e.g., wired communications and/orwireless communications). The wireless device 106 may establish aconnection with the CN 102 via the RAN 104. The RAN 104 mayprovide/configure scheduling, radio resource management, and/orretransmission protocols, for example, as part of the radiocommunications. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to thewireless device 106 over/via the air interface may be referred to as thedownlink and/or downlink communication direction. The communicationdirection from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over/via the airinterface may be referred to as the uplink and/or uplink communicationdirection. Downlink transmissions may be separated and/or distinguishedfrom uplink transmissions, for example, based on at least one of:frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), anyother duplexing schemes, and/or one or more combinations thereof.

As used throughout, the term “wireless device” may comprise one or moreof: a mobile device, a fixed (e.g., non-mobile) device for whichwireless communication is configured or usable, a computing device, anode, a device capable of wirelessly communicating, or any other devicecapable of sending and/or receiving signals. As non-limiting examples, awireless device may comprise, for example: a telephone, a cellularphone, a Wi-Fi phone, a smartphone, a tablet, a computer, a laptop, asensor, a meter, a wearable device, an Internet of Things (IoT) device,a hotspot, a cellular repeater, a vehicle road side unit (RSU), a relaynode, an automobile, a wireless user device (e.g., user equipment (UE),a user terminal (UT), etc.), an access terminal (AT), a mobile station,a handset, a wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), a wirelesscommunication device, and/or any combination thereof.

The RAN 104 may comprise one or more base stations (not shown). As usedthroughout, the term “base station” may comprise one or more of: a basestation, a node, a Node B (NB), an evolved NodeB (eNB), a gNB, anng-eNB, a relay node (e.g., an integrated access and backhaul (JAB)node), a donor node (e.g., a donor eNB, a donor gNB, etc.), an accesspoint (e.g., a Wi-Fi access point), a transmission and reception point(TRP), a computing device, a device capable of wirelessly communicating,or any other device capable of sending and/or receiving signals. A basestation may comprise one or more of each element listed above. Forexample, a base station may comprise one or more TRPs. As othernon-limiting examples, a base station may comprise for example, one ormore of: a Node B (e.g., associated with Universal MobileTelecommunications System (UMTS) and/or third-generation (3G)standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB) (e.g., associated withEvolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and/orfourth-generation (4G) standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a basebandprocessing unit coupled to one or more remote radio heads (RRHs), arepeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donornode, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B(gNB) (e.g., associated with NR and/or fifth-generation (5G) standards),an access point (AP) (e.g., associated with, for example, Wi-Fi or anyother suitable wireless communication standard), any other generationbase station, and/or any combination thereof. A base station maycomprise one or more devices, such as at least one base station centraldevice (e.g., a gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU)) and at least one base stationdistributed device (e.g., a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU)).

A base station (e.g., in the RAN 104) may comprise one or more sets ofantennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 wirelessly(e.g., via an over the air interface). One or more base stations maycomprise sets (e.g., three sets or any other quantity of sets) ofantennas to respectively control multiple cells or sectors (e.g., threecells, three sectors, any other quantity of cells, or any other quantityof sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which areceiver (e.g., a base station receiver) may successfully receivetransmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter)operating in the cell. One or more cells of base stations (e.g., byalone or in combination with other cells) may provide/configure a radiocoverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area tosupport wireless device mobility. A base station comprising threesectors (e.g., or n-sector, where n refers to any quantity n) may bereferred to as a three-sector site (e.g., or an n-sector site) or athree-sector base station (e.g., an n-sector base station).

One or more base stations (e.g., in the RAN 104) may be implemented as asectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more basestations of the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as abaseband processing device/unit coupled to several RRHs, and/or as arepeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a node (e.g.,a donor node). A baseband processing device/unit coupled to RRHs may bepart of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, for example, where thebaseband processing device/unit may be centralized in a pool of basebandprocessing devices/units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify andsend (e.g., transmit, retransmit, rebroadcast, etc.) a radio signalreceived from a donor node. A relay node may perform the substantiallythe same/similar functions as a repeater node. The relay node may decodethe radio signal received from the donor node, for example, to removenoise before amplifying and sending the radio signal.

The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of base stations(e.g., macrocell base stations) that have similar antenna patternsand/or similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployedas a heterogeneous network of base stations (e.g., different basestations that have different antenna patterns). In heterogeneousnetworks, small cell base stations may be used to provide/configuresmall coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap withcomparatively larger coverage areas provided/configured by other basestations (e.g., macrocell base stations). The small coverage areas maybe provided/configured in areas with high data traffic (or so-called“hotspots”) or in areas with a weak macrocell coverage. Examples ofsmall cell base stations may comprise, in order of decreasing coveragearea, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocellbase stations or home base stations.

Examples described herein may be used in a variety of types ofcommunications. For example, communications may be in accordance withthe Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) (e.g., one or morenetwork elements similar to those of the communication network 100),communications in accordance with Institute of Electrical andElectronics Engineers (IEEE), communications in accordance withInternational Telecommunication Union (ITU), communications inaccordance with International Organization for Standardization (ISO),etc. The 3GPP has produced specifications for multiple generations ofmobile networks: a 3G network known as UMTS, a 4G network known asLong-Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE Advanced (LTE-A), and a 5G networkknown as 5G System (5GS) and NR system. 3GPP may produce specificationsfor additional generations of communication networks (e.g., 6G and/orany other generation of communication network). Examples may bedescribed with reference to one or more elements (e.g., the RAN) of a3GPP 5G network, referred to as a next-generation RAN (NG-RAN), or anyother communication network, such as a 3GPP network and/or a non-3GPPnetwork. Examples described herein may be applicable to othercommunication networks, such as 3G and/or 4G networks, and communicationnetworks that may not yet be finalized/specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6Gnetwork), satellite communication networks, and/or any othercommunication network. NG-RAN implements and updates 5G radio accesstechnology referred to as NR and may be provisioned to implement 4Gradio access technology and/or other radio access technologies, such asother 3GPP and/or non-3GPP radio access technologies.

FIG. 1B shows an example communication network 150. The communicationnetwork may comprise a mobile communication network. The communicationnetwork 150 may comprise, for example, a PLMN operated/managed/run by anetwork operator. The communication network 150 may comprise one or moreof: a CN 152 (e.g., a 5G core network (5G-CN)), a RAN 154 (e.g., anNG-RAN), and/or wireless devices 156A and 156B (collectively wirelessdevice(s) 156). The communication network 150 may comprise, and/or adevice within the communication network 150 may communicate with (e.g.,via CN 152), one or more data networks (DN(s)) 170. These components maybe implemented and operate in substantially the same or similar manneras corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may provide/configure the wireless device(s)156 with one or more interfaces to one or more DNs 170, such as publicDNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. Aspart of the interface functionality, the CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may set upend-to-end connections between the wireless device(s) 156 and the one ormore DNs, authenticate the wireless device(s) 156, and/orprovide/configure charging functionality. The CN 152 (e.g., the 5G-CN)may be a service-based architecture, which may differ from other CNs(e.g., such as a 3GPP 4G CN). The architecture of nodes of the CN 152(e.g., 5G-CN) may be defined as network functions that offer servicesvia interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of theCN 152 (e.g., 5G CN) may be implemented in several ways, for example, asnetwork elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instancesrunning on dedicated or shared hardware, and/or as virtualized functionsinstantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise an Access and Mobility ManagementFunction (AMF) device 158A and/or a User Plane Function (UPF) device158B, which may be separate components or one component AMF/UPF device158. The UPF device 158B may serve as a gateway between a RAN 154 (e.g.,NG-RAN) and the one or more DNs 170. The UPF device 158B may performfunctions, such as: packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection anduser plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplinkclassification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or moreDNs 170, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g.,packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplinktraffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and/or downlink datanotification triggering. The UPF device 158B may serve as an anchorpoint for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, anexternal protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point ofinterconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to supporta multi-homed PDU session. The wireless device(s) 156 may be configuredto receive services via a PDU session, which may be a logical connectionbetween a wireless device and a DN.

The AMF device 158A may perform functions, such as: Non-Access Stratum(NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS)security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between accessnetworks (e.g., 3GPP access networks and/or non-3GPP networks), idlemode wireless device reachability (e.g., idle mode UE reachability forcontrol and execution of paging retransmission), registration areamanagement, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, accessauthentication, access authorization including checking of roamingrights, mobility management control (e.g., subscription and policies),network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF)selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN anda wireless device, and AS may refer to the functionality operatingbetween a wireless device and a RAN.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may comprise one or more additional networkfunctions that may not be shown in FIG. 1B. The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) maycomprise one or more devices implementing at least one of: a SessionManagement Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a PolicyControl Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a UnifiedData Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), an AuthenticationServer Function (AUSF), and/or any other function.

The RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) may communicate with the wireless device(s)156 via radio communications (e.g., an over the air interface). Thewireless device(s) 156 may communicate with the CN 152 via the RAN 154.The RAN 154 (e.g., NG-RAN) may comprise one or more first-type basestations (e.g., gNBs comprising a gNB 160A and a gNB 160B (collectivelygNBs 160)) and/or one or more second-type base stations (e.g., ng eNBscomprising an ng-eNB 162A and an ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng eNBs162)). The RAN 154 may comprise one or more of any quantity of types ofbase station. The gNBs 160 and ng eNBs 162 may be referred to as basestations. The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and ng eNBs 162) maycomprise one or more sets of antennas for communicating with thewireless device(s) 156 wirelessly (e.g., an over an air interface). Oneor more base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng eNBs 162) maycomprise multiple sets of antennas to respectively control multiplecells (or sectors). The cells of the base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160and the ng-eNBs 162) may provide a radio coverage to the wirelessdevice(s) 156 over a wide geographic area to support wireless devicemobility.

The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) may beconnected to the CN 152 (e.g., 5G CN) via a first interface (e.g., an NGinterface) and to other base stations via a second interface (e.g., anXn interface). The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using directphysical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlyingtransport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network.The base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162) maycommunicate with the wireless device(s) 156 via a third interface (e.g.,a Uu interface). A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) may communicatewith the wireless device 156A via a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uuinterfaces may be associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacksassociated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements shownin FIG. 1B to exchange data and signaling messages. The protocol stacksmay comprise two planes: a user plane and a control plane. Any otherquantity of planes may be used (e.g., in a protocol stack). The userplane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane mayhandle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

One or more base stations (e.g., the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162)may communicate with one or more AMF/UPF devices, such as the AMF/UPF158, via one or more interfaces (e.g., NG interfaces). A base station(e.g., the gNB 160A) may be in communication with, and/or connected to,the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 via an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface.The NG-U interface may provide/perform delivery (e.g., non-guaranteeddelivery) of user plane PDUs between a base station (e.g., the gNB 160A)and a UPF device (e.g., the UPF 158B). The base station (e.g., the gNB160A) may be in communication with, and/or connected to, an AMF device(e.g., the AMF 158A) via an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-Cinterface may provide/perform, for example, NG interface management,wireless device context management (e.g., UE context management),wireless device mobility management (e.g., UE mobility management),transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, configurationtransfer, and/or warning message transmission.

A wireless device may access the base station, via an interface (e.g.,Uu interface), for the user plane configuration and the control planeconfiguration. The base stations (e.g., gNBs 160) may provide user planeand control plane protocol terminations towards the wireless device(s)156 via the Uu interface. A base station (e.g., the gNB 160A) mayprovide user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward thewireless device 156A over a Uu interface associated with a firstprotocol stack. A base station (e.g., the ng-eNBs 162) may provideEvolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E UTRA) user plane and controlplane protocol terminations towards the wireless device(s) 156 via a Uuinterface (e.g., where E UTRA may refer to the 3GPP 4G radio-accesstechnology). A base station (e.g., the ng-eNB 162B) may provide E UTRAuser plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the wirelessdevice 156B via a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.The user plane and control plane protocol terminations may comprise, forexample, NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations, 4G userplane and control plane protocol terminations, etc.

The CN 152 (e.g., 5G-CN) may be configured to handle one or more radioaccesses (e.g., NR, 4G, and/or any other radio accesses). It may also bepossible for an NR network/device (or any first network/device) toconnect to a 4G core network/device (or any second network/device) in anon-standalone mode (e.g., non-standalone operation). In anon-standalone mode/operation, a 4G core network may be used to provide(or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access,mobility, and/or paging). Although only one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG.1B, one or more base stations (e.g., one or more gNBs and/or one or moreng-eNBs) may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes, for example, toprovide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPFnodes.

An interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and/or NG interfaces) between networkelements (e.g., the network elements shown in FIG. 1B) may be associatedwith a protocol stack that the network elements may use to exchange dataand signaling messages. A protocol stack may comprise two planes: a userplane and a control plane. Any other quantity of planes may be used(e.g., in a protocol stack). The user plane may handle data associatedwith a user (e.g., data of interest to a user). The control plane mayhandle data associated with one or more network elements (e.g.,signaling messages of interest to the network elements).

The communication network 100 in FIG. 1A and/or the communicationnetwork 150 in FIG. 1B may comprise any quantity/number and/or type ofdevices, such as, for example, computing devices, wireless devices,mobile devices, handsets, tablets, laptops, internet of things (IoT)devices, hotspots, cellular repeaters, computing devices, and/or, moregenerally, user equipment (e.g., UE). Although one or more of the abovetypes of devices may be referenced herein (e.g., UE, wireless device,computing device, etc.), it should be understood that any device hereinmay comprise any one or more of the above types of devices or similardevices. The communication network, and any other network referencedherein, may comprise an LTE network, a 5G network, a satellite network,and/or any other network for wireless communications (e.g., any 3GPPnetwork and/or any non-3GPP network). Apparatuses, systems, and/ormethods described herein may generally be described as implemented onone or more devices (e.g., wireless device, base station, eNB, gNB,computing device, etc.), in one or more networks, but it will beunderstood that one or more features and steps may be implemented on anydevice and/or in any network.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane configuration. The user planeconfiguration may comprise, for example, an NR user plane protocolstack. FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration. The controlplane configuration may comprise, for example, an NR control planeprotocol stack. One or more of the user plane configuration and/or thecontrol plane configuration may use a Uu interface that may be between awireless device 210 and a base station 220. The protocol stacks shown inFIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be substantially the same or similar to thoseused for the Uu interface between, for example, the wireless device 156Aand the base station 160A shown in FIG. 1B.

A user plane configuration (e.g., an NR user plane protocol stack) maycomprise multiple layers (e.g., five layers or any other quantity oflayers) implemented in the wireless device 210 and the base station 220(e.g., as shown in FIG. 2A). At the bottom of the protocol stack,physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to thehigher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of theOpen Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The protocol layers above PHY211 may comprise a medium access control layer (MAC) 212, a radio linkcontrol layer (RLC) 213, a packet data convergence protocol layer (PDCP)214, and/or a service data application protocol layer (SDAP) 215. Theprotocol layers above PHY 221 may comprise a medium access control layer(MAC) 222, a radio link control layer (RLC) 223, a packet dataconvergence protocol layer (PDCP) 224, and/or a service data applicationprotocol layer (SDAP) 225. One or more of the four protocol layers abovePHY 211 may correspond to layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSImodel. One or more of the four protocol layers above PHY 221 maycorrespond to layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.

FIG. 3 shows an example of protocol layers. The protocol layers maycomprise, for example, protocol layers of the NR user plane protocolstack. One or more services may be provided between protocol layers.SDAPs (e.g., SDAPS 215 and 225 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3 ) may performQuality of Service (QoS) flow handling. A wireless device (e.g., thewireless devices 106, 156A, 156B, and 210) may receive servicesthrough/via a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between thewireless device and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows310. A UPF (e.g., the UPF 158B) of a CN may map IP packets to the one ormore QoS flows of the PDU session, for example, based on one or more QoSrequirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, error rate, and/or anyother quality/service requirement). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may performmapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows 310 and one or moreradio bearers 320 (e.g., data radio bearers). The mapping/de-mappingbetween the one or more QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320 may bedetermined by the SDAP 225 of the base station 220. The SDAP 215 of thewireless device 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows310 and the radio bearers 320 via reflective mapping and/or controlsignaling received from the base station 220. For reflective mapping,the SDAP 225 of the base station 220 may mark the downlink packets witha QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may bemonitored/detected/identified/indicated/observed by the SDAP 215 of thewireless device 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the oneor more QoS flows 310 and the radio bearers 320.

PDCPs (e.g., the PDCPs 214 and 224 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3 ) mayperform header compression/decompression, for example, to reduce theamount of data that may need to be transmitted over the air interface,ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of datatransmitted over the air interface, and/or integrity protection (e.g.,to ensure control messages originate from intended sources). The PDCPs214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets,in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and/or removal ofpackets received in duplicate due to, for example, a handover (e.g., anintra-gNB handover). The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packetduplication, for example, to improve the likelihood of the packet beingreceived. A receiver may receive the packet in duplicate and may removeany duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for certainservices, such as services that require high reliability.

The PDCP layers (e.g., PDCPs 214 and 224) may perform mapping/de-mappingbetween a split radio bearer and RLC channels (e.g., RLC channels 330)(e.g., in a dual connectivity scenario/configuration). Dual connectivitymay refer to a technique that allows a wireless device to communicatewith multiple cells (e.g., two cells) or, more generally, multiple cellgroups comprising: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group(SCG). A split bearer may be configured and/or used, for example, if asingle radio bearer (e.g., such as one of the radio bearersprovided/configured by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs215 and 225) is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs214 and 224 may map/de-map between the split radio bearer and RLCchannels 330 belonging to the cell groups.

RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may perform segmentation,retransmission via Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and/or removal ofduplicate data units received from MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222,respectively). The RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) may supportmultiple transmission modes (e.g., three transmission modes: transparentmode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM)). TheRLC layers may perform one or more of the noted functions, for example,based on the transmission mode an RLC layer is operating. The RLCconfiguration may be per logical channel. The RLC configuration may notdepend on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations(or other durations). The RLC layers (e.g., RLCs 213 and 223) mayprovide/configure RLC channels as a service to the PDCP layers (e.g.,PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively), such as shown in FIG. 3 .

The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may performmultiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping betweenlogical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexingmay comprise multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units/data portions,belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from TransportBlocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221,respectively). The MAC layer of a base station (e.g., MAC 222) may beconfigured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting,and/or priority handling between wireless devices via dynamicscheduling. Scheduling may be performed by a base station (e.g., thebase station 220 at the MAC 222) for downlink/or and uplink. The MAClayers (e.g., MACs 212 and 222) may be configured to perform errorcorrection(s) via Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQentity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priorityhandling between logical channels of the wireless device 210 via logicalchannel prioritization and/or padding. The MAC layers (e.g., MACs 212and 222) may support one or more numerologies and/or transmissiontimings. Mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization maycontrol which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channelmay use. The MAC layers (e.g., the MACs 212 and 222) mayprovide/configure logical channels 340 as a service to the RLC layers(e.g., the RLCs 213 and 223).

The PHY layers (e.g., PHYs 211 and 221) may perform mapping of transportchannels to physical channels and/or digital and analog signalprocessing functions, for example, for sending and/or receivinginformation (e.g., via an over the air interface). The digital and/oranalog signal processing functions may comprise, for example,coding/decoding and/or modulation/demodulation. The PHY layers (e.g.,PHYs 211 and 221) may perform multi-antenna mapping. The PHY layers(e.g., the PHYs 211 and 221) may provide/configure one or more transportchannels (e.g., transport channels 350) as a service to the MAC layers(e.g., the MACs 212 and 222, respectively).

FIG. 4A shows an example downlink data flow for a user planeconfiguration. The user plane configuration may comprise, for example,the NR user plane protocol stack shown in FIG. 2A. One or more TBs maybe generated, for example, based on a data flow via a user planeprotocol stack. As shown in FIG. 4A, a downlink data flow of three IPpackets (n, n+1, and m) via the NR user plane protocol stack maygenerate two TBs (e.g., at the base station 220). An uplink data flowvia the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink dataflow shown in FIG. 4A. The three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) may bedetermined from the two TBs, for example, based on the uplink data flowvia an NR user plane protocol stack. A first quantity of packets (e.g.,three or any other quantity) may be determined from a second quantity ofTBs (e.g., two or another quantity).

The downlink data flow may begin, for example, if the SDAP 225 receivesthe three IP packets (or other quantity of IP packets) from one or moreQoS flows and maps the three packets (or other quantity of packets) toradio bearers (e.g., radio bearers 402 and 404). The SDAP 225 may mapthe IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and map the IPpacket m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with “H”preceding each SDAP SDU shown in FIG. 4A) may be added to an IP packetto generate an SDAP PDU, which may be referred to as a PDCP SDU. Thedata unit transferred from/to a higher protocol layer may be referred toas a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer, and the dataunit transferred to/from a lower protocol layer may be referred to as aprotocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG.4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 may be an SDU of lower protocollayer PDCP 224 (e.g., PDCP SDU) and may be a PDU of the SDAP 225 (e.g.,SDAP PDU).

Each protocol layer (e.g., protocol layers shown in FIG. 4A) or at leastsome protocol laters may: perform its own function(s) (e.g., one or morefunctions of each protocol layer described with respect to FIG. 3 ), adda corresponding header, and/or forward a respective output to the nextlower layer (e.g., its respective lower layer). The PDCP 224 may performan IP-header compression and/or ciphering. The PDCP 224 may forward itsoutput (e.g., a PDCP PDU, which is an RLC SDU) to the RLC 223. The RLC223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet min FIG. 4A). The RLC 223 may forward its outputs (e.g., two RLC PDUs,which are two MAC SDUs, generated by adding respective subheaders to twoSDU segments (SDU Segs)) to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex anumber of RLC PDUs (MAC SDUs). The MAC 222 may attach a MAC subheader toan RLC PDU (MAC SDU) to form a TB. The MAC subheaders may be distributedacross the MAC PDU (e.g., in an NR configuration as shown in FIG. 4A).The MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of a MAC PDU(e.g., in an LTE configuration). The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce aprocessing time and/or associated latency, for example, if the MAC PDUsubheaders are computed before assembling the full MAC PDU.

FIG. 4B shows an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. A MACPDU may comprise a MAC subheader (H) and a MAC SDU. Each of one or moreMAC subheaders may comprise an SDU length field for indicating thelength (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheadercorresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field foridentifying/indicating the logical channel from which the MAC SDUoriginated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) forindicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R)field for future use.

One or more MAC control elements (CEs) may be added to, or insertedinto, the MAC PDU by a MAC layer, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. As shownin FIG. 4B, two MAC CEs may be inserted/added before two MAC PDUs. TheMAC CEs may be inserted/added at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlinktransmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B). One or more MAC CEs may beinserted/added at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEsmay be used for in band control signaling. Example MAC CEs may comprisescheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and powerheadroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs (e.g., MAC CEs foractivation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel stateinformation (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS)transmission, and prior configured components); discontinuous reception(DRX)-related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access-relatedMAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similarformat as described for the MAC subheader for MAC SDUs and may beidentified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates thetype of control information included in the corresponding MAC CE.

FIG. 5A shows an example mapping for downlink channels. The mapping foruplink channels may comprise mapping between channels (e.g., logicalchannels, transport channels, and physical channels) for downlink. FIG.5B shows an example mapping for uplink channels. The mapping for uplinkchannels may comprise mapping between channels (e.g., logical channels,transport channels, and physical channels) for uplink. Information maybe passed through/via channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHYlayers of a protocol stack (e.g., the NR protocol stack). A logicalchannel may be used between the RLC and the MAC layers. The logicalchannel may be classified/indicated as a control channel that may carrycontrol and/or configuration information (e.g., in the NR controlplane), or as a traffic channel that may carry data (e.g., in the NRuser plane). A logical channel may be classified/indicated as adedicated logical channel that may be dedicated to a specific wirelessdevice, and/or as a common logical channel that may be used by more thanone wireless device (e.g., a group of wireless device).

A logical channel may be defined by the type of information it carries.The set of logical channels (e.g., in an NR configuration) may compriseone or more channels described below. A paging control channel (PCCH)may comprise/carry one or more paging messages used to page a wirelessdevice whose location is not known to the network on a cell level. Abroadcast control channel (BCCH) may comprise/carry system informationmessages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and severalsystem information blocks (SIBs). The system information messages may beused by wireless devices to obtain information about how a cell isconfigured and how to operate within the cell. A common control channel(CCCH) may comprise/carry control messages together with random access.A dedicated control channel (DCCH) may comprise/carry control messagesto/from a specific wireless device to configure the wireless device withconfiguration information. A dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) maycomprise/carry user data to/from a specific wireless device.

Transport channels may be used between the MAC and PHY layers. Transportchannels may be defined by how the information they carry issent/transmitted (e.g., via an over the air interface). The set oftransport channels (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration orany other configuration) may comprise one or more of the followingchannels. A paging channel (PCH) may comprise/carry paging messages thatoriginated from the PCCH. A broadcast channel (BCH) may comprise/carrythe MIB from the BCCH. A downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) maycomprise/carry downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBsfrom the BCCH. An uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) may comprise/carryuplink data and signaling messages. A random access channel (RACH) mayprovide a wireless device with an access to the network without anyprior scheduling.

The PHY layer may use physical channels to pass/transfer informationbetween processing levels of the PHY layer. A physical channel may havean associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying theinformation of one or more transport channels. The PHY layer maygenerate control information to support the low-level operation of thePHY layer. The PHY layer may provide/transfer the control information tothe lower levels of the PHY layer via physical control channels (e.g.,referred to as L1/L2 control channels). The set of physical channels andphysical control channels (e.g., that may be defined by an NRconfiguration or any other configuration) may comprise one or more ofthe following channels. A physical broadcast channel (PBCH) maycomprise/carry the MIB from the BCH. A physical downlink shared channel(PDSCH) may comprise/carry downlink data and signaling messages from theDL-SCH, as well as paging messages from the PCH. A physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) may comprise/carry downlink control information(DCI), which may comprise downlink scheduling commands, uplinkscheduling grants, and uplink power control commands. A physical uplinkshared channel (PUSCH) may comprise/carry uplink data and signalingmessages from the UL-SCH and in some instances uplink controlinformation (UCI) as described below. A physical uplink control channel(PUCCH) may comprise/carry UCI, which may comprise HARQ acknowledgments,channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI),rank indicators (RI), and scheduling requests (SR). A physical randomaccess channel (PRACH) may be used for random access.

The physical layer may generate physical signals to support thelow-level operation of the physical layer, which may be similar to thephysical control channels. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physicallayer signals (e.g., that may be defined by an NR configuration or anyother configuration) may comprise primary synchronization signals (PSS),secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state informationreference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DM-RS),sounding reference signals (SRS), phase-tracking reference signals (PTRS), and/or any other signals.

One or more of the channels (e.g., logical channels, transport channels,physical channels, etc.) may be used to carry out functions associatedwith the control plan protocol stack (e.g., NR control plane protocolstack). FIG. 2B shows an example control plane configuration (e.g., anNR control plane protocol stack). As shown in FIG. 2B, the control planeconfiguration (e.g., the NR control plane protocol stack) may usesubstantially the same/similar one or more protocol layers (e.g., PHY211 and 221, MAC 212 and 222, RLC 213 and 223, and PDCP 214 and 224) asthe example user plane configuration (e.g., the NR user plane protocolstack). Similar four protocol layers may comprise the PHYs 211 and 221,the MACs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224.The control plane configuration (e.g., the NR control plane stack) mayhave radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217and 237 at the top of the control plane configuration (e.g., the NRcontrol plane protocol stack), for example, instead of having the SDAPs215 and 225. The control plane configuration may comprise an AMF 230comprising the NAS protocol 237.

The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionalitybetween the wireless device 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A orany other AMF) and/or, more generally, between the wireless device 210and a CN (e.g., the CN 152 or any other CN). The NAS protocols 217 and237 may provide control plane functionality between the wireless device210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages.There may be no direct path between the wireless device 210 and the AMF230 via which the NAS messages may be transported. The NAS messages maybe transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. The NASprotocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality, such asauthentication, security, a connection setup, mobility management,session management, and/or any other functionality.

The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide/configure control plane functionalitybetween the wireless device 210 and the base station 220 and/or, moregenerally, between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the basestation 220). The RRC layers 216 and 226 may provide/configure controlplane functionality between the wireless device 210 and the base station220 via signaling messages, which may be referred to as RRC messages.The RRC messages may be sent/transmitted between the wireless device 210and the RAN (e.g., the base station 220) using signaling radio bearersand the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAClayer may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same TB.The RRC layers 216 and 226 may provide/configure control planefunctionality, such as one or more of the following functionalities:broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiatedby the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRCconnection between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., the basestation 220); security functions including key management;establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radiobearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS managementfunctions; wireless device measurement reporting (e.g., the wirelessdevice measurement reporting) and control of the reporting; detection ofand recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer.As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRC layers 216 and 226 mayestablish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters forcommunication between the wireless device 210 and the RAN (e.g., thebase station 220).

FIG. 6 shows example RRC states and RRC state transitions. An RRC stateof a wireless device may be changed to another RRC state (e.g., RRCstate transitions of a wireless device). The wireless device may besubstantially the same or similar to the wireless device 106, 210, orany other wireless device. A wireless device may be in at least one of aplurality of states, such as three RRC states comprising RRC connected602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 606 (e.g., RRC_IDLE), and RRCinactive 604 (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE). The RRC inactive 604 may be RRCconnected but inactive.

An RRC connection may be established for the wireless device. Forexample, this may be during an RRC connected state. During the RRCconnected state (e.g., during the RRC connected 602), the wirelessdevice may have an established RRC context and may have at least one RRCconnection with a base station. The base station may be similar to oneof the one or more base stations (e.g., one or more base stations of theRAN 104 shown in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 shown inFIG. 1B, the base station 220 shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any otherbase stations). The base station with which the wireless device isconnected (e.g., has established an RRC connection) may have the RRCcontext for the wireless device. The RRC context, which may be referredto as a wireless device context (e.g., the UE context), may compriseparameters for communication between the wireless device and the basestation. These parameters may comprise, for example, one or more of: AScontexts; radio link configuration parameters; bearer configurationinformation (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, a signaling radiobearer, a logical channel, a QoS flow, and/or a PDU session); securityinformation; and/or layer configuration information (e.g., PHY, MAC,RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information). During the RRCconnected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602), mobility of the wirelessdevice may be managed/controlled by an RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NGRAN 154). The wireless device may measure received signal levels (e.g.,reference signal levels, reference signal received power, referencesignal received quality, received signal strength indicator, etc.) basedon one or more signals sent from a serving cell and neighboring cells.The wireless device may report these measurements to a serving basestation (e.g., the base station currently serving the wireless device).The serving base station of the wireless device may request a handoverto a cell of one of the neighboring base stations, for example, based onthe reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from the RRCconnected state (e.g., RRC connected 602) to an RRC idle state (e.g.,the RRC idle 606) via a connection release procedure 608. The RRC statemay transition from the RRC connected state (e.g., RRC connected 602) tothe RRC inactive state (e.g., RRC inactive 604) via a connectioninactivation procedure 610.

An RRC context may not be established for the wireless device. Forexample, this may be during the RRC idle state. During the RRC idlestate (e.g., the RRC idle 606), an RRC context may not be establishedfor the wireless device. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle606), the wireless device may not have an RRC connection with the basestation. During the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606), thewireless device may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time(e.g., to conserve battery power). The wireless device may wake upperiodically (e.g., each discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle) to monitorfor paging messages (e.g., paging messages set from the RAN). Mobilityof the wireless device may be managed by the wireless device via aprocedure of a cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from theRRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) to the RRC connected state(e.g., the RRC connected 602) via a connection establishment procedure612, which may involve a random access procedure.

A previously established RRC context may be maintained for the wirelessdevice. For example, this may be during the RRC inactive state. Duringthe RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the RRC contextpreviously established may be maintained in the wireless device and thebase station. The maintenance of the RRC context may enable/allow a fasttransition to the RRC connected state (e.g., the RRC connected 602) withreduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from the RRCidle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) to the RRC connected state (e.g.,the RRC connected 602). During the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRCinactive 604), the wireless device may be in a sleep state and mobilityof the wireless device may be managed/controlled by the wireless devicevia a cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from the RRCinactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) to the RRC connected state(e.g., the RRC connected 602) via a connection resume procedure 614. TheRRC state may transition from the RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRCinactive 604) to the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) via aconnection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar toconnection release procedure 608.

An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism.During the RRC idle state (e.g., RRC idle 606) and the RRC inactivestate (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), mobility may be managed/controlledby the wireless device via a cell reselection. The purpose of mobilitymanagement during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) or duringthe RRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may be toenable/allow the network to be able to notify the wireless device of anevent via a paging message without having to broadcast the pagingmessage over the entire mobile communications network. The mobilitymanagement mechanism used during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle606) or during the RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604) mayenable/allow the network to track the wireless device on a cell-grouplevel, for example, so that the paging message may be broadcast over thecells of the cell group that the wireless device currently resideswithin (e.g. instead of sending the paging message over the entiremobile communication network). The mobility management mechanisms forthe RRC idle state (e.g., the RRC idle 606) and the RRC inactive state(e.g., the RRC inactive 604) may track the wireless device on acell-group level. The mobility management mechanisms may do thetracking, for example, using different granularities of grouping. Theremay be a plurality of levels of cell-grouping granularity (e.g., threelevels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within aRAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within agroup of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by atracking area identifier (TAI)).

Tracking areas may be used to track the wireless device (e.g., trackingthe location of the wireless device at the CN level). The CN (e.g., theCN 102, the 5G CN 152, or any other CN) may send to the wireless devicea list of TAIs associated with a wireless device registration area(e.g., a UE registration area). A wireless device may perform aregistration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the locationof the wireless device and provide the wireless device with a new the UEregistration area, for example, if the wireless device moves (e.g., viaa cell reselection) to a cell associated with a TAI that may not beincluded in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area.

RAN areas may be used to track the wireless device (e.g., the locationof the wireless device at the RAN level). For a wireless device in anRRC inactive state (e.g., the RRC inactive 604), the wireless device maybe assigned/provided/configured with a RAN notification area. A RANnotification area may comprise one or more cell identities (e.g., a listof RAIs and/or a list of TAIs). A base station may belong to one or moreRAN notification areas. A cell may belong to one or more RANnotification areas. A wireless device may perform a notification areaupdate with the RAN to update the RAN notification area of the wirelessdevice, for example, if the wireless device moves (e.g., via a cellreselection) to a cell not included in the RAN notification areaassigned/provided/configured to the wireless device.

A base station storing an RRC context for a wireless device or a lastserving base station of the wireless device may be referred to as ananchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC contextfor the wireless device at least during a period of time that thewireless device stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor basestation and/or during a period of time that the wireless device stays inan RRC inactive state (e.g., RRC inactive 604).

A base station (e.g., gNBs 160 in FIG. 1B or any other base station) maybe split in two parts: a central unit (e.g., a base station centralunit, such as a gNB CU) and one or more distributed units (e.g., a basestation distributed unit, such as a gNB DU). A base station central unit(CU) may be coupled to one or more base station distributed units (DUs)using an F1 interface (e.g., an F1 interface defined in an NRconfiguration). The base station CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, andthe SDAP layers. A base station distributed unit (DU) may comprise theRLC, the MAC, and the PHY layers.

The physical signals and physical channels (e.g., described with respectto FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto one or more symbols (e.g.,orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in an NRconfiguration or any other symbols). OFDM is a multicarriercommunication scheme that sends/transmits data over F orthogonalsubcarriers (or tones). The data may be mapped to a series of complexsymbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) symbols orM-phase shift keying (M PSK) symbols or any other modulated symbols),referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbolstreams, for example, before transmission of the data. The F parallelsymbol streams may be treated as if they are in the frequency domain.The F parallel symbols may be used as inputs to an Inverse Fast FourierTransform (IFFT) block that transforms them into the time domain. TheIFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of theF parallel symbol streams. The IFFT block may use each source symbol tomodulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functionsthat correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFTblock may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the Forthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDMsymbol. An OFDM symbol provided/output by the IFFT block may besent/transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency, forexample, after one or more processes (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix)and up-conversion. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed, forexample, using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) block before beingprocessed by the IFFT block. This operation may produce Discrete FourierTransform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by one or morewireless devices in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio(PAPR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at areceiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the sourcesymbols.

FIG. 7 shows an example configuration of a frame. The frame maycomprise, for example, an NR radio frame into which OFDM symbols may begrouped. A frame (e.g., an NR radio frame) may be identified/indicatedby a system frame number (SFN) or any other value. The SFN may repeatwith a period of 1024 frames. One NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms)in duration and may comprise 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. Asubframe may be divided into one or more slots (e.g., depending onnumerologies and/or different subcarrier spacings). Each of the one ormore slots may comprise, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot. Anyquantity of symbols, slots, or duration may be used for any timeinterval.

The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDMsymbols of the slot. A flexible numerology may be supported, forexample, to accommodate different deployments (e.g., cells with carrierfrequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in themm-wave range). A flexible numerology may be supported, for example, inan NR configuration or any other radio configurations. A numerology maybe defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and/or cyclic prefix duration.Subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baselinesubcarrier spacing of 15 kHz. Cyclic prefix durations may be scaled downby powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 μs, forexample, for a numerology in an NR configuration or any other radioconfigurations. Numerologies may be defined with the followingsubcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 μs;30 kHz/2.3 μs; 60 kHz/1.2 μs; 120 kHz/0.59 μs; 240 kHz/0.29 μs, and/orany other subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations.

A slot may have a fixed number/quantity of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDMsymbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing may have ashorter slot duration and more slots per subframe. Examples ofnumerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmissionstructure are shown in FIG. 7 (the numerology with a subcarrier spacingof 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 ). A subframe (e.g., in an NRconfiguration) may be used as a numerology-independent time reference. Aslot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlinktransmissions are scheduled. Scheduling (e.g., in an NR configuration)may be decoupled from the slot duration. Scheduling may start at anyOFDM symbol. Scheduling may last for as many symbols as needed for atransmission, for example, to support low latency. These partial slottransmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or sub-slot transmissions.

FIG. 8 shows an example resource configuration of one or more carriers.The resource configuration of may comprise a slot in the time andfrequency domain for an NR carrier or any other carrier. The slot maycomprise resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). A resourceelement (RE) may be the smallest physical resource (e.g., in an NRconfiguration). An RE may span one OFDM symbol in the time domain by onesubcarrier in the frequency domain, such as shown in FIG. 8 . An RB mayspan twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain, such as shown inFIG. 8 . A carrier (e.g., an NR carrier) may be limited to a width of acertain quantity of RBs and/or subcarriers (e.g., 275 RBs or 275×12=3300subcarriers). Such limitation(s), if used, may limit the carrier (e.g.,NR carrier) frequency based on subcarrier spacing (e.g., carrierfrequency of 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15,30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively). A 400 MHz bandwidth may be set basedon a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit. Any other bandwidth may be setbased on a per carrier bandwidth limit.

A single numerology may be used across the entire bandwidth of a carrier(e.g., an NR such as shown in FIG. 8 ). In other example configurations,multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier. NR and/orother access technologies may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., upto 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all wirelessdevices may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due tohardware limitations and/or different wireless device capabilities).Receiving and/or utilizing the full carrier bandwidth may beprohibitive, for example, in terms of wireless device power consumption.A wireless device may adapt the size of the receive bandwidth of thewireless device, for example, based on the amount of traffic thewireless device is scheduled to receive (e.g., to reduce powerconsumption and/or for other purposes). Such an adaptation may bereferred to as bandwidth adaptation.

Configuration of one or more bandwidth parts (BWPs) may support one ormore wireless devices not capable of receiving the full carrierbandwidth. BWPs may support bandwidth adaptation, for example, for suchwireless devices not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth. ABWP (e.g., a BWP of an NR configuration) may be defined by a subset ofcontiguous RBs on a carrier. A wireless device may be configured (e.g.,via an RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs per serving cell andone or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPsper serving cell and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). One ormore of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active, forexample, at a given time. The one or more BWPs may be referred to asactive BWPs of the serving cell. A serving cell may have one or morefirst active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second activeBWPs in the secondary uplink carrier, for example, if the serving cellis configured with a secondary uplink carrier.

A downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked withan uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs (e.g., for unpairedspectra). A downlink BWP and an uplink BWP may be linked, for example,if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index ofthe uplink BWP are the same. A wireless device may expect that thecenter frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as the center frequencyfor an uplink BWP (e.g., for unpaired spectra).

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more controlresource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. The base stationmay configure the wireless device with one or more CORESETS, forexample, for a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on aprimary cell (PCell) or on a secondary cell (SCell). A search space maycomprise a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where thewireless device may monitor/find/detect/identify control information.The search space may be a wireless device-specific search space (e.g., aUE-specific search space) or a common search space (e.g., potentiallyusable by a plurality of wireless devices or a group of wireless userdevices). A base station may configure a group of wireless devices witha common search space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell(PSCell), in an active downlink BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more resourcesets for one or more PUCCH transmissions, for example, for an uplink BWPin a set of configured uplink BWPs. A wireless device may receivedownlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP, forexample, according to a configured numerology (e.g., a configuredsubcarrier spacing and/or a configured cyclic prefix duration) for thedownlink BWP. The wireless device may send/transmit uplink transmissions(e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP, for example, according to aconfigured numerology (e.g., a configured subcarrier spacing and/or aconfigured cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).

One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided/comprised in DownlinkControl Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicatewhich BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for oneor more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicatorfields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplinktransmissions.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with adefault downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associatedwith a PCell. A default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlinkBWP, for example, if the base station does not provide/configure adefault downlink BWP to/for the wireless device. The wireless device maydetermine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP, for example,based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a BWP inactivitytimer value for a PCell. The wireless device may start or restart a BWPinactivity timer at any appropriate time. The wireless device may startor restart the BWP inactivity timer, for example, if one or moreconditions are satisfied. The one or more conditions may comprise atleast one of: the wireless device detects DCI indicating an activedownlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectraoperation; the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active downlinkBWP other than a default downlink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation;and/or the wireless device detects DCI indicating an active uplink BWPother than a default uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. Thewireless device may start/run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration(e.g., increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, ordecrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero), for example, ifthe wireless device does not detect DCI during a time interval (e.g., 1ms or 0.5 ms). The wireless device may switch from the active downlinkBWP to the default downlink BWP, for example, if the BWP inactivitytimer expires.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with oneor more BWPs. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from a firstBWP to a second BWP, for example, after (e.g., based on or in responseto) receiving DCI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP. A wirelessdevice may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP, forexample, after (e.g., based on or in response to) an expiry of the BWPinactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP).

A downlink BWP switching may refer to switching an active downlink BWPfrom a first downlink BWP to a second downlink BWP (e.g., the seconddownlink BWP is activated and the first downlink BWP is deactivated). Anuplink BWP switching may refer to switching an active uplink BWP from afirst uplink BWP to a second uplink BWP (e.g., the second uplink BWP isactivated and the first uplink BWP is deactivated). Downlink and uplinkBWP switching may be performed independently (e.g., in pairedspectrum/spectra). Downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performedsimultaneously (e.g., in unpaired spectrum/spectra). Switching betweenconfigured BWPs may occur, for example, based on RRC signaling, DCIsignaling, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation ofrandom access.

FIG. 9 shows an example of configured BWPs. Bandwidth adaptation usingmultiple BWPs (e.g., three configured BWPs for an NR carrier) may beavailable. A wireless device configured with multiple BWPs (e.g., thethree BWPs) may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point.The BWPs may comprise: a BWP 902 having a bandwidth of 40 MHz and asubcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 having a bandwidth of 10 MHz anda subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 having a bandwidth of 20MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initialactive BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The wireless devicemay switch between BWPs at switching points. The wireless device mayswitch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. Theswitching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reasons.The switching at a switching point 908 may occur, for example, after(e.g., based on or in response to) an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer(e.g., indicating switching to the default BWP). The switching at theswitching point 908 may occur, for example, after (e.g., based on or inresponse to) receiving DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. Thewireless device may switch at a switching point 910 from an active BWP904 to the BWP 906, for example, after or in response receiving DCIindicating BWP 906 as a new active BWP. The wireless device may switchat a switching point 912 from an active BWP 906 to the BWP 904, forexample, after (e.g., based on or in response to) an expiry of a BWPinactivity timer. The wireless device may switch at the switching point912 from an active BWP 906 to the BWP 904, for example, after or inresponse receiving DCI indicating BWP 904 as a new active BWP. Thewireless device may switch at a switching point 914 from an active BWP904 to the BWP 902, for example, after or in response receiving DCIindicating the BWP 902 as a new active BWP.

Wireless device procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may bethe same/similar as those on a primary cell, for example, if thewireless device is configured for a secondary cell with a defaultdownlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value. Thewireless device may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP forthe secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the wireless deviceuses the timer value and/or default BWPs for a primary cell. The timervalue (e.g., the BWP inactivity timer) may be configured per cell (e.g.,for one or more BWPs), for example, via RRC signaling or any othersignaling. One or more active BWPs may switch to another BWP, forexample, based on an expiration of the BWP inactivity timer.

Two or more carriers may be aggregated and data may be simultaneouslysent/transmitted to/from the same wireless device using carrieraggregation (CA) (e.g., to increase data rates). The aggregated carriersin CA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs). There may be anumber/quantity of serving cells for the wireless device (e.g., oneserving cell for a CC), for example, if CA is configured/used. The CCsmay have multiple configurations in the frequency domain.

FIG. 10A shows example CA configurations based on CCs. As shown in FIG.10A, three types of CA configurations may comprise an intraband(contiguous) configuration 1002, an intraband (non-contiguous)configuration 1004, and/or an interband configuration 1006. In theintraband (contiguous) configuration 1002, two CCs may be aggregated inthe same frequency band (frequency band A) and may be located directlyadjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband(non-contiguous) configuration 1004, two CCs may be aggregated in thesame frequency band (frequency band A) but may be separated from eachother in the frequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration1006, two CCs may be located in different frequency bands (e.g.,frequency band A and frequency band B, respectively).

A network may set the maximum quantity of CCs that can be aggregated(e.g., up to 32 CCs may be aggregated in NR, or any other quantity maybe aggregated in other systems). The aggregated CCs may have the same ordifferent bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD,FDD, or any other duplexing schemes). A serving cell for a wirelessdevice using CA may have a downlink CC. One or more uplink CCs may beoptionally configured for a serving cell (e.g., for FDD). The ability toaggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, forexample, if the wireless device has more data traffic in the downlinkthan in the uplink.

One of the aggregated cells for a wireless device may be referred to asa primary cell (PCell), for example, if a CA is configured. The PCellmay be the serving cell that the wireless initially connects to oraccess to, for example, during or at an RRC connection establishment, anRRC connection reestablishment, and/or a handover. The PCell mayprovide/configure the wireless device with NAS mobility information andthe security input. Wireless device may have different PCells. For thedownlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to asthe downlink primary CC (DL PCC). For the uplink, the carriercorresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC(UL PCC). The other aggregated cells (e.g., associated with CCs otherthan the DL PCC and UL PCC) for the wireless device may be referred toas secondary cells (SCells). The SCells may be configured, for example,after the PCell is configured for the wireless device. An SCell may beconfigured via an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure. For thedownlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as adownlink secondary CC (DL SCC). For the uplink, the carriercorresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC(UL SCC).

Configured SCells for a wireless device may be activated or deactivated,for example, based on traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of anSCell may cause the wireless device to stop PDCCH and PDSCH reception onthe SCell and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell. ConfiguredSCells may be activated or deactivated, for example, using a MAC CE(e.g., the MAC CE described with respect to FIG. 4B). A MAC CE may use abitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in asubset of configured SCells) for the wireless device are activated ordeactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated, for example, after(e.g., based on or in response to) an expiration of an SCelldeactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell may beconfigured).

DCI may comprise control information, such as scheduling assignments andscheduling grants, for a cell. DCI may be sent/transmitted via the cellcorresponding to the scheduling assignments and/or scheduling grants,which may be referred to as a self-scheduling. DCI comprising controlinformation for a cell may be sent/transmitted via another cell, whichmay be referred to as a cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink controlinformation (UCI) may comprise control information, such as HARQacknowledgments and channel state feedback (e.g., CQI, PMI, and/or RI)for aggregated cells. UCI may be sent/transmitted via an uplink controlchannel (e.g., a PUCCH) of the PCell or a certain SCell (e.g., an SCellconfigured with PUCCH). For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs,the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided intomultiple PUCCH groups.

FIG. 10B shows example group of cells. Aggregated cells may beconfigured into one or more PUCCH groups (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10B).One or more cell groups or one or more uplink control channel groups(e.g., a PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050) may comprise one ormore downlink CCs, respectively. The PUCCH group 1010 may comprise oneor more downlink CCs, for example, three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011(e.g., a DL PCC), an SCell 1012 (e.g., a DL SCC), and an SCell 1013(e.g., a DL SCC). The PUCCH group 1050 may comprise one or more downlinkCCs, for example, three downlink CCs: a PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1051(e.g., a DL SCC), an SCell 1052 (e.g., a DL SCC), and an SCell 1053(e.g., a DL SCC). One or more uplink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010 may beconfigured as a PCell 1021 (e.g., a UL PCC), an SCell 1022 (e.g., a ULSCC), and an SCell 1023 (e.g., a UL SCC). One or more uplink CCs of thePUCCH group 1050 may be configured as a PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061(e.g., a UL SCC), an SCell 1062 (e.g., a UL SCC), and an SCell 1063(e.g., a UL SCC). UCI related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group1010, shown as UCI 1031, UCI 1032, and UCI 1033, may be sent/transmittedvia the uplink of the PCell 1021 (e.g., via the PUCCH of the PCell1021). UCI related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown asUCI 1071, UCI 1072, and UCI 1073, may be sent/transmitted via the uplinkof the PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061 (e.g., via the PUCCH of the PUCCHSCell 1061). A single uplink PCell may be configured to send/transmitUCI relating to the six downlink CCs, for example, if the aggregatedcells shown in FIG. 10B are not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 andthe PUCCH group 1050. The PCell 1021 may become overloaded, for example,if the UCIs 1031, 1032, 1033, 1071, 1072, and 1073 are sent/transmittedvia the PCell 1021. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the PCell1021 and the PUCCH SCell (or PSCell) 1061, overloading may be preventedand/or reduced.

A PCell may comprise a downlink carrier (e.g., the PCell 1011) and anuplink carrier (e.g., the PCell 1021). An SCell may comprise only adownlink carrier. A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionallyan uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cellindex. The physical cell ID or the cell index may indicate/identify adownlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example,depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. Aphysical cell ID may be determined, for example, using a synchronizationsignal (e.g., PSS and/or SSS) sent/transmitted via a downlink componentcarrier. A cell index may be determined, for example, using one or moreRRC messages. A physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, anda cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. A first physicalcell ID for a first downlink carrier may refer to the first physicalcell ID for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. Substantiallythe same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrieractivation. Activation of a first carrier may refer to activation of acell comprising the first carrier.

A multi-carrier nature of a PHY layer may be exposed/indicated to a MAClayer (e.g., in a CA configuration). A HARQ entity may operate on aserving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grantper serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissionsof the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.

For the downlink, a base station may send/transmit (e.g., unicast,multicast, and/or broadcast), to one or more wireless devices, one ormore reference signals (RSs) (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DM-RS, and/orPT-RS). For the uplink, the one or more wireless devices maysend/transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DM-RS, PT-RS,and/or SRS). The PSS and the SSS may be sent/transmitted by the basestation and used by the one or more wireless devices to synchronize theone or more wireless devices with the base station. A synchronizationsignal (SS)/physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block may comprise thePSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station may periodicallysend/transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks, which may be referred to asSSBs.

FIG. 11A shows an example mapping of one or more SS/PBCH blocks. A burstof SS/PBCH blocks may comprise one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be sent/transmittedperiodically (e.g., every 2 frames, 20 ms, or any other durations). Aburst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame havinga duration of 5 ms). Such parameters (e.g., the number of SS/PBCH blocksper burst, periodicity of bursts, position of the burst within theframe) may be configured, for example, based on at least one of: acarrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block issent/transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; aconfiguration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); and/or anyother suitable factor(s). A wireless device may assume a subcarrierspacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency beingmonitored, for example, unless the radio network configured the wirelessdevice to assume a different subcarrier spacing.

The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain(e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in FIG. 11A or any other quantity/numberof symbols) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain(e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers or any other quantity/number ofsubcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common centerfrequency. The PSS may be sent/transmitted first and may span, forexample, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may besent/transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be sent/transmitted afterthe PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240subcarriers (e.g., in the second and fourth OFDM symbols as shown inFIG. 11A) and/or may span fewer than 240 subcarriers (e.g., in the thirdOFDM symbols as shown in FIG. 11A).

The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains maynot be known to the wireless device (e.g., if the wireless device issearching for the cell). The wireless device may monitor a carrier forthe PSS, for example, to find and select the cell. The wireless devicemay monitor a frequency location within the carrier. The wireless devicemay search for the PSS at a different frequency location within thecarrier, for example, if the PSS is not found after a certain duration(e.g., 20 ms). The wireless device may search for the PSS at a differentfrequency location within the carrier, for example, as indicated by asynchronization raster. The wireless device may determine the locationsof the SSS and the PBCH, respectively, for example, based on a knownstructure of the SS/PBCH block if the PSS is found at a location in thetime and frequency domains. The SS/PBCH block may be a cell-defining SSblock (CD-SSB). A primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. TheCD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. A cellselection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD-SSB.

The SS/PBCH block may be used by the wireless device to determine one ormore parameters of the cell. The wireless device may determine aphysical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell, for example, based on thesequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The wireless device maydetermine a location of a frame boundary of the cell, for example, basedon the location of the SS/PBCH block. The SS/PBCH block may indicatethat it has been sent/transmitted in accordance with a transmissionpattern. An SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern may be a knowndistance from the frame boundary (e.g., a predefined distance for a RANconfiguration among one or more networks, one or more base stations, andone or more wireless devices).

The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and/or forward error correction(FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by thePBCH may comprise/carry one or more DM-RSs for demodulation of the PBCH.The PBCH may comprise an indication of a current system frame number(SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parametersmay facilitate time synchronization of the wireless device to the basestation. The PBCH may comprise a MIB used to send/transmit to thewireless device one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by thewireless device to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI)associated with the cell. The RMSI may comprise a System InformationBlock Type 1 (SIB1). The SIB1 may comprise information for the wirelessdevice to access the cell. The wireless device may use one or moreparameters of the MIB to monitor a PDCCH, which may be used to schedulea PDSCH. The PDSCH may comprise the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded usingparameters provided/comprised in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate anabsence of SIB1. The wireless device may be pointed to a frequency, forexample, based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1. The wirelessdevice may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which thewireless device is pointed.

The wireless device may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blockssent/transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located(QCLed) (e.g., having substantially the same/similar Doppler spread,Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rxparameters). The wireless device may not assume QCL for SS/PBCH blocktransmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices. SS/PBCH blocks(e.g., those within a half-frame) may be sent/transmitted in spatialdirections (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of thecell). A first SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a first spatialdirection using a first beam, a second SS/PBCH block may besent/transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam, athird SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in a third spatial directionusing a third beam, a fourth SS/PBCH block may be sent/transmitted in afourth spatial direction using a fourth beam, etc.

A base station may send/transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks, forexample, within a frequency span of a carrier. A first PCI of a firstSS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from asecond PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks sent/transmitted in different frequencylocations may be different or substantially the same.

The CSI-RS may be sent/transmitted by the base station and used by thewireless device to acquire/obtain/determine channel state information(CSI). The base station may configure the wireless device with one ormore CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. Thebase station may configure a wireless device with one or more of thesame/similar CSI-RSs. The wireless device may measure the one or moreCSI-RSs. The wireless device may estimate a downlink channel stateand/or generate a CSI report, for example, based on the measuring of theone or more downlink CSI-RSs. The wireless device may send/transmit theCSI report to the base station (e.g., based on periodic CSI reporting,semi-persistent CSI reporting, and/or aperiodic CSI reporting). The basestation may use feedback provided by the wireless device (e.g., theestimated downlink channel state) to perform a link adaptation.

The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device withone or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associatedwith a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. Thebase station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RSresource. The base station may indicate to the wireless device that aCSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/ordeactivated.

The base station may configure the wireless device to report CSImeasurements. The base station may configure the wireless device toprovide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently.For periodic CSI reporting, the wireless device may be configured with atiming and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodicCSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. The basestation may command the wireless device to measure a configured CSI-RSresource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurement(s). Forsemi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure thewireless device to send/transmit periodically, and selectively activateor deactivate the periodic reporting (e.g., via one or moreactivation/deactivation MAC CEs and/or one or more DCIs). The basestation may configure the wireless device with a CSI-RS resource set andCSI reports, for example, using RRC signaling.

The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating,for example, up to 32 antenna ports (or any other quantity of antennaports). The wireless device may be configured to use/employ the sameOFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a CORESET, for example, if thedownlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed and resource elementsassociated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resourceblocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The wireless device may beconfigured to use/employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS andSS/PBCH blocks, for example, if the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocksare spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlinkCSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

Downlink DM-RSs may be sent/transmitted by a base station andreceived/used by a wireless device for a channel estimation. Thedownlink DM-RSs may be used for coherent demodulation of one or moredownlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). A network (e.g., an NRnetwork) may support one or more variable and/or configurable DM-RSpatterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DM-RSconfiguration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. A front-loadedDM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or twoadjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-statically configure thewireless device with a number/quantity (e.g. a maximum number/quantity)of front-loaded DM-RS symbols for a PDSCH. A DM-RS configuration maysupport one or more DM-RS ports. A DM-RS configuration may support up toeight orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports per wireless device (e.g., forsingle user-MIMO). A DM-RS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonaldownlink DM-RS ports per wireless device (e.g., for multiuser-MIMO). Aradio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DM-RSstructure for downlink and uplink. A DM-RS location, a DM-RS pattern,and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The basestation may send/transmit a downlink DM-RS and a corresponding PDSCH,for example, using the same precoding matrix. The wireless device mayuse the one or more downlink DM-RSs for coherent demodulation/channelestimation of the PDSCH.

A transmitter (e.g., a transmitter of a base station) may use a precodermatrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. The transmitter may usea first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precodermatrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the secondprecoder matrix may be different, for example, based on the firstbandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The wireless devicemay assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs.The set of PRBs may be determined/indicated/identified/denoted as aprecoding resource block group (PRG).

A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The wireless device may assumethat at least one symbol with DM-RS is present on a layer of the one ormore layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure one or moreDM-RSs for a PDSCH (e.g., up to 3 DM-RSs for the PDSCH). Downlink PT-RSmay be sent/transmitted by a base station and used by a wireless device,for example, for a phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS ispresent or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/orthe pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a wirelessdevice-specific basis, for example, using a combination of RRC signalingand/or an association with one or more parameters used/employed forother purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may beindicated by DCI. A dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS, if configured,may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at leastMCS. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support a plurality of PT-RSdensities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. A frequencydomain density (if configured/present) may be associated with at leastone configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The wireless device mayassume a same precoding for a DM-RS port and a PT-RS port. Thequantity/number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than the quantity/number ofDM-RS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may beconfigured/allocated/confined in the scheduled time/frequency durationfor the wireless device. Downlink PT-RS may be sent/transmitted viasymbols, for example, to facilitate a phase tracking at the receiver.

The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink DM-RS to a base station,for example, for a channel estimation. The base station may use theuplink DM-RS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physicalchannels. The wireless device may send/transmit an uplink DM-RS with aPUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequenciesthat is similar to a range of frequencies associated with thecorresponding physical channel. The base station may configure thewireless device with one or more uplink DM-RS configurations. At leastone DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Thefront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g.,one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DM-RSs may beconfigured to send/transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or aPUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the wirelessdevice with a number/quantity (e.g. the maximum number/quantity) offront-loaded DM-RS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which thewireless device may use to schedule a single-symbol DM-RS and/or adouble-symbol DM-RS. A network (e.g., an NR network) may support (e.g.,for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM))a common DM-RS structure for downlink and uplink. A DM-RS location, aDM-RS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DM-RS may besubstantially the same or different.

A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers. A wireless device maysend/transmit at least one symbol with DM-RS present on a layer of theone or more layers of the PUSCH. A higher layer may configure one ormore DM-RSs (e.g., up to three DM-RSs) for the PUSCH. Uplink PT-RS(which may be used by a base station for a phase tracking and/or aphase-noise compensation) may or may not be present, for example,depending on an RRC configuration of the wireless device. The presenceand/or the pattern of an uplink PT-RS may be configured on a wirelessdevice-specific basis (e.g., a UE-specific basis), for example, by acombination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parametersconfigured/employed for other purposes (e.g., MCS), which may beindicated by DCI. A dynamic presence of an uplink PT-RS, if configured,may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at leastMCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densitiesdefined in time/frequency domain. A frequency domain density (ifconfigured/present) may be associated with at least one configuration ofa scheduled bandwidth. The wireless device may assume a same precodingfor a DM-RS port and a PT-RS port. A quantity/number of PT-RS ports maybe less than a quantity/number of DM-RS ports in a scheduled resource.An uplink PT-RS may be configured/allocated/confined in the scheduledtime/frequency duration for the wireless device.

One or more SRSs may be sent/transmitted by a wireless device to a basestation, for example, for a channel state estimation to support uplinkchannel dependent scheduling and/or a link adaptation. SRSsent/transmitted by the wireless device may enable/allow a base stationto estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. Ascheduler at the base station may use/employ the estimated uplinkchannel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCHtransmission for the wireless device. The base station maysemi-statically configure the wireless device with one or more SRSresource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configurethe wireless device with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource setapplicability may be configured, for example, by a higher layer (e.g.,RRC) parameter. An SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or moreSRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior,periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be sent/transmitted at a timeinstant (e.g., simultaneously), for example, if a higher layer parameterindicates beam management. The wireless device may send/transmit one ormore SRS resources in SRS resource sets. A network (e.g., an NR network)may support aperiodic, periodic, and/or semi-persistent SRStransmissions. The wireless device may send/transmit SRS resources, forexample, based on one or more trigger types. The one or more triggertypes may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or moreDCI formats. At least one DCI format may be used/employed for thewireless device to select at least one of one or more configured SRSresource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered basedon higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRStriggered based on one or more DCI formats. The wireless device may beconfigured to send/transmit an SRS, for example, after a transmission ofa PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DM-RS if a PUSCH and an SRS aresent/transmitted in a same slot. A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure a wireless device with one or more SRS configurationparameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resourceconfiguration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior ofan SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic,semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, mini-slot, and/or subframelevel periodicity; an offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRSresource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDMsymbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hoppingbandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.

An antenna port may be determined/defined such that the channel overwhich a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from thechannel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed.The receiver may infer/determine the channel (e.g., fading gain,multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying a second symbol on anantenna port, from the channel for conveying a first symbol on theantenna port, for example, if the first symbol and the second symbol aresent/transmitted on the same antenna port. A first antenna port and asecond antenna port may be referred to as quasi co-located (QCLed), forexample, if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over whicha first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferredfrom the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port isconveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at leastone of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an averagegain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.

Channels that use beamforming may require beam management. Beammanagement may comprise a beam measurement, a beam selection, and/or abeam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more referencesignals. A beam may be identified by one or more beamformed referencesignals. The wireless device may perform a downlink beam measurement,for example, based on one or more downlink reference signals (e.g., aCSI-RS) and generate a beam measurement report. The wireless device mayperform the downlink beam measurement procedure, for example, after anRRC connection is set up with a base station.

FIG. 11B shows an example mapping of one or more CSI-RSs. The CSI-RSsmay be mapped in the time and frequency domains. Each rectangular blockshown in FIG. 11B may correspond to a resource block (RB) within abandwidth of a cell. A base station may send/transmit one or more RRCmessages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicatingone or more CSI-RSs. One or more of parameters may be configured byhigher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RSresource configuration. The one or more of the parameters may compriseat least one of: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number ofCSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element(RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., asubframe location, an offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), aCSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code divisionmultiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmissioncomb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity,crs-portscount, mbsfn-subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid,qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters.

One or more beams may be configured for a wireless device in a wirelessdevice-specific configuration. Three beams are shown in FIG. 11B (beam#1, beam #2, and beam #3), but more or fewer beams may be configured.Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be sent/transmittedin one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may beallocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be sent/transmitted in one or moresubcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated withCSI-RS 1103 that may be sent/transmitted in one or more subcarriers inan RB of a third symbol. A base station may use other subcarriers in thesame RB (e.g., those that are not used to send/transmit CSI-RS 1101) tosend/transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another wirelessdevice, for example, by using frequency division multiplexing (FDM).Beams used for a wireless device may be configured such that beams forthe wireless device use symbols different from symbols used by beams ofother wireless devices, for example, by using time domain multiplexing(TDM). A wireless device may be served with beams in orthogonal symbols(e.g., no overlapping symbols), for example, by using the TDM.

CSI-RSs (e.g., CSI-RSs 1101, 1102, 1103) may be sent/transmitted by thebase station and used by the wireless device for one or moremeasurements. The wireless device may measure an RSRP of configuredCSI-RS resources. The base station may configure the wireless devicewith a reporting configuration, and the wireless device may report theRSRP measurements to a network (e.g., via one or more base stations)based on the reporting configuration. The base station may determine,based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmissionconfiguration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of referencesignals. The base station may indicate one or more TCI states to thewireless device (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or DCI). Thewireless device may receive a downlink transmission with an Rx beamdetermined based on the one or more TCI states. The wireless device mayor may not have a capability of beam correspondence. The wireless devicemay determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam, forexample, based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam,if the wireless device has the capability of beam correspondence. Thewireless device may perform an uplink beam selection procedure todetermine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam, for example, if thewireless device does not have the capability of beam correspondence. Thewireless device may perform the uplink beam selection procedure, forexample, based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resourcesconfigured to the wireless device by the base station. The base stationmay select and indicate uplink beams for the wireless device, forexample, based on measurements of the one or more SRS resourcessent/transmitted by the wireless device.

A wireless device may determine/assess (e.g., measure) a channel qualityof one or more beam pair links, for example, in a beam managementprocedure. A beam pair link may comprise a Tx beam of a base station andan Rx beam of the wireless device. The Tx beam of the base station maysend/transmit a downlink signal, and the Rx beam of the wireless devicemay receive the downlink signal. The wireless device may send/transmit abeam measurement report, for example, based on theassessment/determination. The beam measurement report may indicate oneor more beam pair quality parameters comprising at least one of: one ormore beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index,or the like), an RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channelquality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (RI).

FIG. 12A shows examples of downlink beam management procedures. One ormore downlink beam management procedures (e.g., downlink beam managementprocedures P1, P2, and P3) may be performed. Procedure P1 may enable ameasurement (e.g., a wireless device measurement) on Tx beams of a TRP(or multiple TRPs) (e.g., to support a selection of one or more basestation Tx beams and/or wireless device Rx beams). The Tx beams of abase station and the Rx beams of a wireless device are shown as ovals inthe top row of P1 and bottom row of P1, respectively. Beamforming (e.g.,at a TRP) may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (e.g., thebeam sweeps shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in acounter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). Beamforming(e.g., at a wireless device) may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set ofbeams (e.g., the beam sweeps shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, asovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows).Procedure P2 may be used to enable a measurement (e.g., a wirelessdevice measurement) on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2,as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by thedashed arrow). The wireless device and/or the base station may performprocedure P2, for example, using a smaller set of beams than the set ofbeams used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams usedin procedure P1. Procedure P2 may be referred to as a beam refinement.The wireless device may perform procedure P3 for an Rx beamdetermination, for example, by using the same Tx beam(s) of the basestation and sweeping Rx beam(s) of the wireless device.

FIG. 12B shows examples of uplink beam management procedures. One ormore uplink beam management procedures (e.g., uplink beam managementprocedures U1, U2, and U3) may be performed. Procedure U1 may be used toenable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a wirelessdevice (e.g., to support a selection of one or more Tx beams of thewireless device and/or Rx beams of the base station). The Tx beams ofthe wireless device and the Rx beams of the base station are shown asovals in the top row of U1 and bottom row of U1, respectively).Beamforming (e.g., at the wireless device) may comprise one or more beamsweeps, for example, a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in thebottom rows of U1 and U3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise directionindicated by the dashed arrows). Beamforming (e.g., at the base station)may comprise one or more beam sweeps, for example, an Rx beam sweep froma set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated ina counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrows). ProcedureU2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam, forexample, if the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The wireless device and/or thebase station may perform procedure U2, for example, using a smaller setof beams than the set of beams used in procedure P1, or using narrowerbeams than the beams used in procedure P1. Procedure U2 may be referredto as a beam refinement. The wireless device may perform procedure U3 toadjust its Tx beam, for example, if the base station uses a fixed Rxbeam.

A wireless device may initiate/start/perform a beam failure recovery(BFR) procedure, for example, based on detecting a beam failure. Thewireless device may send/transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, UCI,an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like), for example, based on the initiatingthe BFR procedure. The wireless device may detect the beam failure, forexample, based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) ofan associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an errorrate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lowerthan a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/orthe like).

The wireless device may measure a quality of a beam pair link, forexample, using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one ormore SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or moreDM-RSs. A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of ablock error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plusnoise ratio (SINR) value, an RSRQ value, and/or a CSI value measured onRS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is QCLedwith one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shareddata channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or moreDM-RSs of the channel may be QCLed, for example, if the channelcharacteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, an average delay,delay spread, a spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from atransmission via the RS resource to the wireless device are similar orthe same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via thechannel to the wireless device.

A network (e.g., an NR network comprising a gNB and/or an ng-eNB) and/orthe wireless device may initiate/start/perform a random accessprocedure. A wireless device in an RRC idle (e.g., an RRC_IDLE) stateand/or an RRC inactive (e.g., an RRC_INACTIVE) state mayinitiate/perform the random access procedure to request a connectionsetup to a network. The wireless device may initiate/start/perform therandom access procedure from an RRC connected (e.g., an RRC_CONNECTED)state. The wireless device may initiate/start/perform the random accessprocedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission ofan SR if there is no PUCCH resource available) and/oracquire/obtain/determine an uplink timing (e.g., if an uplinksynchronization status is non-synchronized). The wireless device mayinitiate/start/perform the random access procedure to request one ormore system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system informationblocks, such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The wireless device mayinitiate/start/perform the random access procedure for a beam failurerecovery request. A network may initiate/start/perform a random accessprocedure, for example, for a handover and/or for establishing timealignment for an SCell addition.

FIG. 13A shows an example four-step random access procedure. Thefour-step random access procedure may comprise a four-stepcontention-based random access procedure. A base station maysend/transmit a configuration message 1310 to a wireless device, forexample, before initiating the random access procedure. The four-steprandom access procedure may comprise transmissions of four messagescomprising: a first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311), a second message (e.g.,Msg 2 1312), a third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313), and a fourth message(e.g., Msg 4 1314). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may comprise apreamble (or a random access preamble). The first message (e.g., Msg 11311) may be referred to as a preamble. The second message (e.g., Msg 21312) may comprise as a random access response (RAR). The second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be referred to as an RAR.

The configuration message 1310 may be sent/transmitted, for example,using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages mayindicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to thewireless device. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at leastone of: general parameters for one or more random access procedures(e.g., RACH-configGeneral); cell-specific parameters (e.g.,RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g.,RACH-configDedicated). The base station may send/transmit (e.g.,broadcast or multicast) the one or more RRC messages to one or morewireless devices. The one or more RRC messages may be wirelessdevice-specific. The one or more RRC messages that are wirelessdevice-specific may be, for example, dedicated RRC messagessent/transmitted to a wireless device in an RRC connected (e.g., anRRC_CONNECTED) state and/or in an RRC inactive (e.g., an RRC_INACTIVE)state. The wireless devices may determine, based on the one or more RACHparameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit powerfor transmission of the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or thethird message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The wireless device may determine areception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312) and the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314), forexample, based on the one or more RACH parameters.

The one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in theconfiguration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH(PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the first message (e.g.,Msg 1 1311). The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined (e.g., bya network comprising one or more base stations). The one or more RACHparameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACHoccasions (e.g., prach-ConfigIndex). The one or more RACH parameters mayindicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b)one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters mayindicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one ormore reference signals. The one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCHblocks and/or CSI-RSs. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate aquantity/number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or aquantity/number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.

The one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in theconfiguration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmitpower of first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or third message (e.g.,Msg 3 1313). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate a referencepower for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/oran initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or morepower offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. The one ormore RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offsetbetween SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of thefirst message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and the third message (e.g., Msg 31313); and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one ormore RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds, for example,based on which the wireless device may determine at least one referencesignal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., anormal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).

The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may comprise one or more preambletransmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preambleretransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or morepreamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B). A preamble group maycomprise one or more preambles. The wireless device may determine thepreamble group, for example, based on a pathloss measurement and/or asize of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The wireless device maymeasure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/orCSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRPabove an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/orrsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS). The wireless device may select at least onepreamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or aselected preamble group, for example, if the association between the oneor more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured byan RRC message.

The wireless device may determine the preamble, for example, based onthe one or more RACH parameters provided/configured/comprised in theconfiguration message 1310. The wireless device may determine thepreamble, for example, based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRPmeasurement, and/or a size of the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). Theone or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximumquantity/number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholdsfor determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B).A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure thewireless device with an association between one or more preambles andone or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). The wirelessdevice may determine the preamble to be comprised in first message(e.g., Msg 1 1311), for example, based on the association if theassociation is configured. The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) may besent/transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions.The wireless device may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBsand/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of thePRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g.,ra-ssb-OccasionMskIndex and/or ra-OccasionList) may indicate anassociation between the PRACH occasions and the one or more referencesignals.

The wireless device may perform a preamble retransmission, for example,if no response is received after (e.g., based on or in response to) apreamble transmission (e.g., for a period of time, such as a monitoringwindow for monitoring an RAR). The wireless device may increase anuplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission. The wirelessdevice may select an initial preamble transmit power, for example, basedon a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble powerconfigured by the network. The wireless device may determine toresend/retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power.The wireless device may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g.,PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preambleretransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incrementalincrease in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The wirelessdevice may ramp up the uplink transmit power, for example, if thewireless device determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS)that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The wirelessdevice may count the quantity/number of preamble transmissions and/orretransmissions, for example, using a counter parameter (e.g.,PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The wireless device may determine that arandom access procedure has been completed unsuccessfully, for example,if the quantity/number of preamble transmissions exceeds a thresholdconfigured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax)without receiving a successful response (e.g., an RAR).

The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., received by the wirelessdevice) may comprise an RAR. The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) maycomprise multiple RARs corresponding to multiple wireless devices. Thesecond message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may be received, for example, after(e.g., based on or in response to) the sending/transmitting of the firstmessage (e.g., Msg 1 1311). The second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may bescheduled on the DL-SCH and may be indicated by a PDCCH, for example,using a random access radio network temporary identifier (RA RNTI). Thesecond message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) may indicate that the first message(e.g., Msg 1 1311) was received by the base station. The second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312) may comprise a time-alignment command that may beused by the wireless device to adjust the transmission timing of thewireless device, a scheduling grant for transmission of the thirdmessage (e.g., Msg 3 1313), and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). Thewireless device may determine/start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the second message (e.g., Msg2 1312), for example, after sending/transmitting the first message(e.g., Msg 1 1311) (e.g., a preamble). The wireless device may determinethe start time of the time window, for example, based on a PRACHoccasion that the wireless device uses to send/transmit the firstmessage (e.g., Msg 1 1311) (e.g., the preamble). The wireless device maystart the time window one or more symbols after the last symbol of thefirst message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) comprising the preamble (e.g., thesymbol in which the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) comprising thepreamble transmission was completed or at a first PDCCH occasion from anend of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may bedetermined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be mapped in a commonsearch space (e.g., a Type1-PDCCH common search space) configured by anRRC message. The wireless device may identify/determine the RAR, forexample, based on an RNTI. Radio network temporary identifiers (RNTIs)may be used depending on one or more events initiating/starting therandom access procedure. The wireless device may use a RA-RNTI, forexample, for one or more communications associated with random access orany other purpose. The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions inwhich the wireless device sends/transmits a preamble. The wirelessdevice may determine the RA-RNTI, for example, based on at least one of:an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or aUL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example RA-RNTI may bedetermined as follows:

RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id

where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion(e.g., 0≤s_id<14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACHoccasion in a system frame (e.g., 0≤t_id<80), f_id may be an index ofthe PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0≤f_id<8), andul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission(e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).

The wireless device may send/transmit the third message (e.g., Msg 31313), for example, after (e.g., based on or in response to) asuccessful reception of the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g.,using resources identified in the Msg2 1312). The third message (e.g.,Msg 3 1313) may be used, for example, for contention resolution in thecontention-based random access procedure. A plurality of wirelessdevices may send/transmit the same preamble to a base station, and thebase station may send/transmit an RAR that corresponds to a wirelessdevice. Collisions may occur, for example, if the plurality of wirelessdevice interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves. Contentionresolution (e.g., using the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) and thefourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314)) may be used to increase thelikelihood that the wireless device does not incorrectly use an identityof another the wireless device. The wireless device may comprise adevice identifier in the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., aC-RNTI if assigned, a TC RNTI comprised in the second message (e.g., Msg2 1312), and/or any other suitable identifier), for example, to performcontention resolution.

The fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) may be received, for example,after (e.g., based on or in response to) the sending/transmitting of thethird message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The base station may address thewireless on the PDCCH (e.g., the base station may send the PDCCH to thewireless device) using a C-RNTI, for example, If the C-RNTI was includedin the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313). The random access procedure maybe determined to be successfully completed, for example, if the unique CRNTI of the wireless device is detected on the PDCCH (e.g., the PDCCH isscrambled by the C-RNTI). fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) may bereceived using a DL-SCH associated with a TC RNTI, for example, if theTC RNTI is comprised in the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313) (e.g., ifthe wireless device is in an RRC idle (e.g., an RRC_IDLE) state or nototherwise connected to the base station). The wireless device maydetermine that the contention resolution is successful and/or thewireless device may determine that the random access procedure issuccessfully completed, for example, if a MAC PDU is successfullydecoded and a MAC PDU comprises the wireless device contentionresolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwise corresponds withthe CCCH SDU sent/transmitted in third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313).

The wireless device may be configured with an SUL carrier and/or an NULcarrier. An initial access (e.g., random access) may be supported via anuplink carrier. A base station may configure the wireless device withmultiple RACH configurations (e.g., two separate RACH configurationscomprising: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier).For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the networkmay indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The wireless device maydetermine to use the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality ofone or more reference signals (e.g., one or more reference signalsassociated with the NUL carrier) is lower than a broadcast threshold.Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the firstmessage (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 3 1313))may remain on, or may be performed via, the selected carrier. Thewireless device may switch an uplink carrier during the random accessprocedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313). Thewireless device may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for thefirst message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and/or the third message (e.g., Msg 31313), for example, based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., alisten-before-talk).

FIG. 13B shows a two-step random access procedure. The two-step randomaccess procedure may comprise a two-step contention-free random accessprocedure. Similar to the four-step contention-based random accessprocedure, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure,send/transmit a configuration message 1320 to the wireless device. Theconfiguration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to theconfiguration message 1310. The procedure shown in FIG. 13B may comprisetransmissions of two messages: a first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and asecond message (e.g., Msg 2 1322). The first message (e.g., Msg 1 1321)and the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322) may be analogous in somerespects to the first message (e.g., Msg 1 1311) and a second message(e.g., Msg 2 1312), respectively. The two-step contention-free randomaccess procedure may not comprise messages analogous to the thirdmessage (e.g., Msg 3 1313) and/or the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314).

The two-step (e.g., contention-free) random access procedure may beconfigured/initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, anSCell addition, and/or a handover. A base station may indicate, orassign to, the wireless device a preamble to be used for the firstmessage (e.g., Msg 1 1321). The wireless device may receive, from thebase station via a PDCCH and/or an RRC, an indication of the preamble(e.g., ra-PreambleIndex).

The wireless device may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) tomonitor a PDCCH for the RAR, for example, after (e.g., based on or inresponse to) sending/transmitting the preamble. The base station mayconfigure the wireless device with one or more beam failure recoveryparameters, such as a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in asearch space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceId).The base station may configure the one or more beam failure recoveryparameters, for example, in association with a beam failure recoveryrequest. The separate time window for monitoring the PDCCH and/or an RARmay be configured to start after sending/transmitting a beam failurerecovery request (e.g., the window may start any quantity of symbolsand/or slots after sending/transmitting the beam failure recoveryrequest). The wireless device may monitor for a PDCCH transmissionaddressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space. During thetwo-step (e.g., contention-free) random access procedure, the wirelessdevice may determine that a random access procedure is successful, forexample, after (e.g., based on or in response to) sending/transmittingfirst message (e.g., Msg 1 1321) and receiving a corresponding secondmessage (e.g., Msg 2 1322). The wireless device may determine that arandom access procedure has successfully been completed, for example, ifa PDCCH transmission is addressed to a corresponding C-RNTI. Thewireless device may determine that a random access procedure hassuccessfully been completed, for example, if the wireless devicereceives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to apreamble sent/transmitted by the wireless device and/or the RARcomprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The wirelessdevice may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgementfor an SI request.

FIG. 13C shows an example two-step random access procedure. Similar tothe random access procedures shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base stationmay, prior to initiation of the procedure, send/transmit a configurationmessage 1330 to the wireless device. The configuration message 1330 maybe analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/orthe configuration message 1320. The procedure shown in FIG. 13C maycomprise transmissions of multiple messages (e.g., two messagescomprising: a first message (e.g., Msg A 1331) and a second message(e.g., Msg B 1332)).

Msg A 1320 may be sent/transmitted in an uplink transmission by thewireless device. Msg A 1320 may comprise one or more transmissions of apreamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similarand/or equivalent to the contents of the third message (e.g., Msg 31313) (e.g., shown in FIG. 13A). The transport block 1342 may compriseUCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like). The wireless devicemay receive the second message (e.g., Msg B 1332), for example, after(e.g., based on or in response to) sending/transmitting the firstmessage (e.g., Msg A 1331). The second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) maycomprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents ofthe second message (e.g., Msg 2 1312) (e.g., an RAR shown in FIGS. 13A),the contents of the second message (e.g., Msg 2 1322) (e.g., an RARshown in FIG. 13B) and/or the fourth message (e.g., Msg 4 1314) (e.g.,shown in FIG. 13A).

The wireless device may start/initiate the two-step random accessprocedure (e.g., the two-step random access procedure shown in FIG. 13C)for a licensed spectrum and/or an unlicensed spectrum. The wirelessdevice may determine, based on one or more factors, whether tostart/initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or morefactors may comprise at least one of: a radio access technology in use(e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the wireless device has avalid TA or not; a cell size; the RRC state of the wireless device; atype of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any othersuitable factors.

The wireless device may determine, based on two-step RACH parameterscomprised in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or anuplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block1342 (e.g., comprised in the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331)). The RACHparameters may indicate an MCS, a time-frequency resource, and/or apower control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. Atime-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., aPRACH) and a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transportblock 1342 (e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/orCDM. The RACH parameters may enable the wireless device to determine areception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/orreceiving second message (e.g., Msg B 1332).

The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data),an identifier of the wireless device, security information, and/ordevice information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity(IMSI)). The base station may send/transmit the second message (e.g.,Msg B 1332) as a response to the first message (e.g., Msg A 1331). Thesecond message (e.g., Msg B 1332) may comprise at least one of: apreamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command;an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); awireless device identifier (e.g., a UE identifier for contentionresolution); and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The wirelessdevice may determine that the two-step random access procedure issuccessfully completed, for example, if a preamble identifier in thesecond message (e.g., Msg B 1332) corresponds to, or is matched to, apreamble sent/transmitted by the wireless device and/or the identifierof the wireless device in second message (e.g., Msg B 1332) correspondsto, or is matched to, the identifier of the wireless device in the firstmessage (e.g., Msg A 1331) (e.g., the transport block 1342).

A wireless device and a base station may exchange control signaling(e.g., control information). The control signaling may be referred to asL1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g.,layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2) of the wireless device orthe base station. The control signaling may comprise downlink controlsignaling sent/transmitted from the base station to the wireless deviceand/or uplink control signaling sent/transmitted from the wirelessdevice to the base station.

The downlink control signaling may comprise at least one of: a downlinkscheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplinkradio resources and/or a transport format; slot format information; apreemption indication; a power control command; and/or any othersuitable signaling. The wireless device may receive the downlink controlsignaling in a payload sent/transmitted by the base station via a PDCCH.The payload sent/transmitted via the PDCCH may be referred to asdownlink control information (DCI). The PDCCH may be a group commonPDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of wireless devices. TheGC-PDCCH may be scrambled by a group common RNTI.

A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC)parity bits to DCI, for example, in order to facilitate detection oftransmission errors. The base station may scramble the CRC parity bitswith an identifier of a wireless device (or an identifier of a group ofwireless devices), for example, if the DCI is intended for the wirelessdevice (or the group of the wireless devices). Scrambling the CRC paritybits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or anexclusive-OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits.The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of an RNTI.

DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated bythe type of an RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. DCI having CRCparity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paginginformation and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTImay be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. DCI having CRC parity bitsscrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate abroadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may bepredefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. DCI having CRC parity bitsscrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a randomaccess response (RAR). DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cellRNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmissionand/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. DCI having CRCparity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicatea contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 shownin FIG. 13A). Other RNTIs configured for a wireless device by a basestation may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS RNTI), a TransmitPower Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit PowerControl-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI(TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot FormatIndication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), aModulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C RNTI), and/or the like.

A base station may send/transmit DCIs with one or more DCI formats, forexample, depending on the purpose and/or content of the DCIs. DCI format0_0 may be used for scheduling of a PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 maybe a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format0_1 may be used for scheduling of a PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCIpayloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for schedulingof a PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g.,with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling ofa PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0).DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to agroup of wireless devices. DCI format 2_1 may be used forinforming/notifying a group of wireless devices of a physical resourceblock and/or an OFDM symbol where the group of wireless devices mayassume no transmission is intended to the group of wireless devices. DCIformat 22 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC)command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmissionof a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more wirelessdevices. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in futurereleases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share thesame DCI size.

The base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polarcoding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation, for example,after scrambling the DCI with an RNTI. A base station may map the codedand modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for aPDCCH. The base station may send/transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupyinga number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs), for example,based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the basestation. The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregationlevel) may be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCEmay comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REGmay comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of thecoded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mappingof CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).

FIG. 14A shows an example of CORESET configurations. The CORESETconfigurations may be for a bandwidth part or any other frequency bands.The base station may send/transmit DCI via a PDCCH on one or morecontrol resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise atime-frequency resource in which the wireless device attempts/tries todecode DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station mayconfigure a size and a location of the CORESET in the time-frequencydomain. A first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 may occur or maybe set/configured at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401may overlap with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. Athird CORESET 1403 may occur or may be set/configured at a third symbolin the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 may occur or may be set/configured atthe seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number ofresource blocks in frequency domain.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping. The CCE-to-REGmapping may be performed for DCI transmission via a CORESET and PDCCHprocessing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g.,for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleavedmapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interferencecoordination and/or frequency-selective transmission of controlchannels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REGmapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with aCCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., by an RRC configuration). A CORESET may beconfigured with an antenna port QCL parameter. The antenna port QCLparameter may indicate QCL information of a DM-RS for a PDCCH receptionvia the CORESET.

The base station may send/transmit, to the wireless device, one or moreRRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETsand one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters mayindicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. Asearch space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs(e.g., at a given aggregation level). The configuration parameters mayindicate at least one of: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitoredper aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCHmonitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by thewireless device; and/or whether a search space set is a common searchspace set or a wireless device-specific search space set (e.g., aUE-specific search space set). A set of CCEs in the common search spaceset may be predefined and known to the wireless device. A set of CCEs inthe wireless device-specific search space set (e.g., the UE-specificsearch space set) may be configured, for example, based on the identityof the wireless device (e.g., C-RNTI).

As shown in FIG. 14B, the wireless device may determine a time-frequencyresource for a CORESET based on one or more RRC messages. The wirelessdevice may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved ornon-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET, forexample, based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The wirelessdevice may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space setsconfigured on/for the CORESET, for example, based on the one or more RRCmessages. The wireless device may monitor a set of PDCCH candidatesaccording to configuration parameters of a search space set. Thewireless device may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or moreCORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprisedecoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidatesaccording to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decodingDCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (orconfigured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats(e.g., the number of CCEs, the number of PDCCH candidates in commonsearch spaces, and/or the number of PDCCH candidates in the wirelessdevice-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The wireless devicemay determine DCI as valid for the wireless device, for example, after(e.g., based on or in response to) CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bitsfor CRC parity bits of the DCI matching an RNTI value). The wirelessdevice may process information comprised in the DCI (e.g., a schedulingassignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, adownlink preemption, and/or the like).

The wireless device may send/transmit uplink control signaling (e.g.,UCI) to a base station. The uplink control signaling may comprise HARQacknowledgements for received DL-SCH transport blocks. The wirelessdevice may send/transmit the HARQ acknowledgements, for example, after(e.g., based on or in response to) receiving a DL-SCH transport block.Uplink control signaling may comprise CSI indicating a channel qualityof a physical downlink channel. The wireless device may send/transmitthe CSI to the base station. The base station, based on the receivedCSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprisingmulti-antenna and beamforming schemes) for downlink transmission(s).Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). Thewireless device may send/transmit an SR indicating that uplink data isavailable for transmission to the base station. The wireless device maysend/transmit UCI (e.g., HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report,SR, and the like) via a PUCCH or a PUSCH. The wireless device maysend/transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one ofseveral PUCCH formats.

There may be multiple PUCCH formats (e.g., five PUCCH formats). Awireless device may determine a PUCCH format, for example, based on asize of UCI (e.g., a quantity/number of uplink symbols of UCItransmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a lengthof one or two OFDM symbols and may comprise two or fewer bits. Thewireless device may send/transmit UCI via a PUCCH resource, for example,using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over/via one or two symbolsand the quantity/number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive ornegative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two. PUCCH format 1 may occupya number of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols)and may comprise two or fewer bits. The wireless device may use PUCCHformat 1, for example, if the transmission is over/via four or moresymbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may comprise more than two bits.The wireless device may use PUCCH format 2, for example, if thetransmission is over/via one or two symbols and the quantity/number ofUCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number of OFDMsymbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols) and may comprisemore than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCH format 3, forexample, if the transmission is four or more symbols, thequantity/number of UCI bits is two or more, and the PUCCH resource doesnot comprise an orthogonal cover code (OCC). PUCCH format 4 may occupy anumber of OFDM symbols (e.g., between four and fourteen OFDM symbols)and may comprise more than two bits. The wireless device may use PUCCHformat 4, for example, if the transmission is four or more symbols, thequantity/number of UCI bits is two or more, and the PUCCH resourcecomprises an OCC.

The base station may send/transmit configuration parameters to thewireless device for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, for example,using an RRC message. The plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up tofour sets in NR, or up to any other quantity of sets in other systems)may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set maybe configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCHresources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resourceidentifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximumnumber) of UCI information bits the wireless device may send/transmitusing one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.The wireless device may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resourcesets, for example, based on a total bit length of the UCI informationbits (e.g., HARQ-ACK, SR, and/or CSI) if configured with a plurality ofPUCCH resource sets. The wireless device may select a first PUCCHresource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0,” forexample, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is two orfewer. The wireless device may select a second PUCCH resource set havinga PUCCH resource set index equal to “1,” for example, if the total bitlength of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than orequal to a first configured value. The wireless device may select athird PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2,”for example, if the total bit length of UCI information bits is greaterthan the first configured value and less than or equal to a secondconfigured value. The wireless device may select a fourth PUCCH resourceset having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3,” for example, if thetotal bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the secondconfigured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406,1706, or any other quantity of bits).

The wireless device may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCHresource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission, forexample, after determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality ofPUCCH resource sets. The wireless device may determine the PUCCHresource, for example, based on a PUCCH resource indicator in DCI (e.g.,with DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on/via a PDCCH. An n-bit(e.g., a three-bit) PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate oneof multiple (e.g., eight) PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Thewireless device may send/transmit the UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI and/or SR)using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in theDCI, for example, based on the PUCCH resource indicator.

FIG. 15A shows an example communications between a wireless device and abase station. A wireless device 1502 and a base station 1504 may be partof a communication network, such as the communication network 100 shownin FIG. 1A, the communication network 150 shown in FIG. 1B, or any othercommunication network. A communication network may comprise more thanone wireless device and/or more than one base station, withsubstantially the same or similar configurations as those shown in FIG.15A.

The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a corenetwork (not shown) via radio communications over the air interface (orradio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 may bereferred to as the downlink. The communication direction from thewireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface maybe referred to as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separatedfrom uplink transmissions, for example, using various duplex schemes(e.g., FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the duplexing techniques).

For the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from thebase station 1504 may be provided/transferred/sent to the processingsystem 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may beprovided/transferred/sent to the processing system 1508 by, for example,a core network. For the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504from the wireless device 1502 may be provided/transferred/sent to theprocessing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processingsystem 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 andlayer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2may comprise an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer,for example, described with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3 , andFIG. 4A. Layer 3 may comprise an RRC layer, for example, described withrespect to FIG. 2B.

The data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may beprovided/transferred/sent to a transmission processing system 1510 ofbase station 1504, for example, after being processed by the processingsystem 1508. The data to be sent to base station 1504 may beprovided/transferred/sent to a transmission processing system 1520 ofthe wireless device 1502, for example, after being processed by theprocessing system 1518. The transmission processing system 1510 and thetransmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may comprise a PHY layer, for example, describedwith respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3 , and FIG. 4A. Forsending/transmission processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example,forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving,rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels,modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) ormulti-antenna processing, and/or the like.

A reception processing system 1512 of the base station 1504 may receivethe uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. The receptionprocessing system 1512 of the base station 1504 may comprise one or moreTRPs. A reception processing system 1522 of the wireless device 1502 mayreceive the downlink transmission from the base station 1504. Thereception processing system 1522 of the wireless device 1502 maycomprise one or more antenna panels. The reception processing system1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer, for example, describedwith respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3 , and FIG. 4A. For receiveprocessing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection,forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping oftransport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physicalchannels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.

The base station 1504 may comprise multiple antennas (e.g., multipleantenna panels, multiple TRPs, etc.). The wireless device 1502 maycomprise multiple antennas (e.g., multiple antenna panels, etc.). Themultiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO ormulti-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g.,single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO), transmit/receive diversity, and/orbeamforming. The wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 mayhave a single antenna.

The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may beassociated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readablemediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may beexecuted by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system1518, respectively, to carry out one or more of the functionalities(e.g., one or more functionalities described herein and otherfunctionalities of general computers, processors, memories, and/or otherperipherals). The transmission processing system 1510 and/or thereception processing system 1512 may be coupled to the memory 1514and/or another memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computerreadable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that maybe executed to carry out one or more of their respectivefunctionalities. The transmission processing system 1520 and/or thereception processing system 1522 may be coupled to the memory 1524and/or another memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computerreadable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that maybe executed to carry out one or more of their respectivefunctionalities.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 maycomprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The oneor more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, forexample, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP),a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), afield programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logicdevice, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardwarecomponents, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processingsystem 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least oneof signal coding/processing, data processing, power control,input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enablethe wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 to operate in awireless environment.

The processing system 1508 may be connected to one or more peripherals1516. The processing system 1518 may be connected to one or moreperipherals 1526. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or moreperipherals 1526 may comprise software and/or hardware that providefeatures and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, akeypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver,a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequencymodulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, anelectronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or moresensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, aradar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, acamera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or theprocessing system 1518 may receive input data (e.g., user input data)from, and/or provide output data (e.g., user output data) to, the one ormore peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. Theprocessing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive powerfrom a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power tothe other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source maycomprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solarcell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system1508 may be connected to a Global Positioning System (GPS) chipset 1517.The processing system 1518 may be connected to a Global PositioningSystem (GPS) chipset 1527. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527may be configured to determine and provide geographic locationinformation of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504,respectively.

FIG. 15B shows example elements of a computing device that may be usedto implement any of the various devices described herein, including, forexample, the base station 160A, 160B, 162A, 162B, 220, and/or 1504, thewireless device 106, 156A, 156B, 210, and/or 1502, or any other basestation, wireless device, AMF, UPF, network device, or computing devicedescribed herein. The computing device 1530 may include one or moreprocessors 1531, which may execute instructions stored in therandom-access memory (RAM) 1533, the removable media 1534 (such as aUniversal Serial Bus (USB) drive, compact disk (CD) or digital versatiledisk (DVD), or floppy disk drive), or any other desired storage medium.Instructions may also be stored in an attached (or internal) hard drive1535. The computing device 1530 may also include a security processor(not shown), which may execute instructions of one or more computerprograms to monitor the processes executing on the processor 1531 andany process that requests access to any hardware and/or softwarecomponents of the computing device 1530 (e.g., ROM 1532, RAM 1533, theremovable media 1534, the hard drive 1535, the device controller 1537, anetwork interface 1539, a GPS 1541, a Bluetooth interface 1542, a WiFiinterface 1543, etc.). The computing device 1530 may include one or moreoutput devices, such as the display 1536 (e.g., a screen, a displaydevice, a monitor, a television, etc.), and may include one or moreoutput device controllers 1537, such as a video processor. There mayalso be one or more user input devices 1538, such as a remote control,keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, etc. The computing device1530 may also include one or more network interfaces, such as a networkinterface 1539, which may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, ora combination of the two. The network interface 1539 may provide aninterface for the computing device 1530 to communicate with a network1540 (e.g., a RAN, or any other network). The network interface 1539 mayinclude a modem (e.g., a cable modem), and the external network 1540 mayinclude communication links, an external network, an in-home network, aprovider's wireless, coaxial, fiber, or hybrid fiber/coaxialdistribution system (e.g., a DOCSIS network), or any other desirednetwork. Additionally, the computing device 1530 may include alocation-detecting device, such as a global positioning system (GPS)microprocessor 1541, which may be configured to receive and processglobal positioning signals and determine, with possible assistance froman external server and antenna, a geographic position of the computingdevice 1530.

The example in FIG. 15B may be a hardware configuration, although thecomponents shown may be implemented as software as well. Modificationsmay be made to add, remove, combine, divide, etc. components of thecomputing device 1530 as desired. Additionally, the components may beimplemented using basic computing devices and components, and the samecomponents (e.g., processor 1531, ROM storage 1532, display 1536, etc.)may be used to implement any of the other computing devices andcomponents described herein. For example, the various componentsdescribed herein may be implemented using computing devices havingcomponents such as a processor executing computer-executableinstructions stored on a computer-readable medium, as shown in FIG. 15B.Some or all of the entities described herein may be software based, andmay co-exist in a common physical platform (e.g., a requesting entitymay be a separate software process and program from a dependent entity,both of which may be executed as software on a common computing device).

FIG. 16A shows an example structure for uplink transmission. Processingof a baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel maycomprise/perform one or more functions. The one or more functions maycomprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits togenerate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valuedmodulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transformprecoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of thecomplex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols toresource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain SingleCarrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), CP-OFDM signal foran antenna port, or any other signals; and/or the like. An SC-FDMAsignal for uplink transmission may be generated, for example, iftransform precoding is enabled. A CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmissionmay be generated, for example, if transform precoding is not enabled(e.g., as shown in FIG. 16A). These functions are examples and othermechanisms for uplink transmission may be implemented.

FIG. 16B shows an example structure for modulation and up-conversion ofa baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be acomplex-valued SC-FDMA, CP-OFDM baseband signal (or any other basebandsignals) for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical RandomAccess Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may beperformed/employed, for example, prior to transmission.

FIG. 16C shows an example structure for downlink transmissions.Processing of a baseband signal representing a physical downlink channelmay comprise/perform one or more functions. The one or more functionsmay comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to besent/transmitted on/via a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bitsto generate complex-valued modulation symbols; mapping of thecomplex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmissionlayers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layerfor transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valuedmodulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generationof complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/orthe like. These functions are examples and other mechanisms for downlinktransmission may be implemented.

FIG. 16D shows an example structure for modulation and up-conversion ofa baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be acomplex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port or any othersignal. Filtering may be performed/employed, for example, prior totransmission.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, one or more messages(e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a pluralityof cells (e.g., a primary cell, one or more secondary cells). Thewireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g.,two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality ofcells. The one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configurationparameters) may comprise parameters of PHY, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRClayers for configuring the wireless device. The configuration parametersmay comprise parameters for configuring PHY and MAC layer channels,bearers, etc. The configuration parameters may comprise parametersindicating values of timers for PHY, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers,and/or communication channels.

A timer may begin running, for example, if it is started, and continuerunning until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started,for example, if it is not running or restarted if it is running. A timermay be associated with a value (e.g., the timer may be started orrestarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire if itreaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated, forexample, until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWPswitching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for aprocess. With respect to an implementation and/or procedure related toone or more timers or other parameters, it will be understood that theremay be multiple ways to implement the one or more timers or otherparameters. One or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may beused to measure a time period/window for the procedure. A random accessresponse window timer may be used for measuring a window of time forreceiving a random access response. The time difference between two timestamps may be used, for example, instead of starting a random accessresponse window timer and determine the expiration of the timer. Aprocess for measuring a time window may be restarted, for example, if atimer is restarted. Other example implementations may beconfigured/provided to restart a measurement of a time window.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more SRSresource sets. A base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more SRS resource sets, for example, by a higher layer parameter(e.g., SRS-ResourceSet). The base station may configure the wirelessdevice with one or more SRS resources by a higher layer parameter (e.g.,SRS-Resource), for example, for an SRS resource set of the one or moreSRS resource sets. The wireless device may indicate a maximum value of anumber/quantity of the one or more SRS resources to the base station(e.g., by SRS_capability). The base station may configure anapplicability of the SRS resource set by a higher layer parameter usagein the higher layer parameter (e.g., SRS-ResourceSet).

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant,one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources in each SRS resourceset (e.g., simultaneously, during a same time period). The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant, one SRSresource of the one or more SRS resources in each SRS resource set(e.g., simultaneously, during a same time period), for example, if thehigher layer parameter usage is set to an indication, such as‘BeamManagement’ and/or the like. The wireless device may determine thatthe one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources in each SRSresource set may have the same time domain behavior in a same BWP (e.g.,uplink BWP). The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the one SRSresource of the one or more SRS resources in each SRS resource set inthe same BWP simultaneously. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources in eachSRS resource set in the same BWP simultaneously, for example, based ondetermining that the one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resourcesin each SRS resource set may have the same time domain behavior in asame BWP (e.g., uplink BWP).

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant,only one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets(e.g., simultaneously or substantially simultaneously). The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant, only one SRSresource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets (e.g.,simultaneously or substantially simultaneously), for example, if thehigher layer parameter usage is set to an indication, such as‘BeamManagement’ and/or the like. The wireless device may determine thatthe only one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource setsmay have the same time domain behavior in a same BWP (e.g., uplink BWP).The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the only one SRS resourcein each of the one or more SRS resource sets in the same BWPsimultaneously. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the onlyone SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets in thesame BWP simultaneously, for example, based on determining that the onlyone SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets may havethe same time domain behavior in a same BWP (e.g., uplink BWP).

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at a given time instant,one SRS resource in each of one or more SRS resource setssimultaneously. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), at agiven time instant, one SRS resource in each of one or more SRS resourcesets simultaneously, for example, if the higher layer parameter usage isset to an indication, such as ‘BeamManagement’ and/or the like. Thewireless device may determine that the one SRS resource in each of theone or more SRS resource sets may have the same time domain behavior ina same BWP (e.g., uplink BWP). The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resourcesets in the same BWP simultaneously. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resourcesets in the same BWP simultaneously, for example, based on determiningthat the one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource setsmay have the same time domain behavior in a same BWP (e.g., uplink BWP).

The one or more SRS resource sets may comprise at least a first SRSresource set and/or a second SRS resource set. The first SRS resourceset may comprise one or more first SRS resources. The one or more firstSRS resources may comprise a first SRS resource and a second SRSresource. The second SRS resource set may comprise one or more secondSRS resources. The one or more second SRS resources may comprise a thirdSRS resource and a fourth SRS resource.

Time domain behaviors in a BWP may be the same. For example, first timedomain behavior of the first SRS resource and a third time domainbehavior of the third SRS resource may be the same in a BWP. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit), in a given time instant inthe BWP, the first SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and thethird SRS resource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (orsubstantially simultaneously or during a same time period). The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit), in a given time instant in the BWP,the first SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and the third SRSresource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (or substantiallysimultaneously or during a same time period), for example, if the higherlayer parameter usage is set to an indication, such as ‘BeamManagement’and/or the like. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), in agiven time instant in the BWP, the first SRS resource of the first SRSresource set and the third SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously or during a same timeperiod), for example, based on the first time domain behavior of thefirst SRS resource and the third time domain behavior of the third SRSresource being the same.

Time behaviors may be different in a BWP. For example, a first timedomain behavior of the first SRS resource and a fourth time domainbehavior of the fourth SRS resource may be different in a BWP. Thewireless device may not send (e.g., transmit), in a given time instantin the BWP, the first SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and thefourth SRS resource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (orsubstantially simultaneously or during a same time period). The wirelessdevice may not send (e.g., transmit), in a given time instant in theBWP, the first SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and the fourthSRS resource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (orsubstantially simultaneously or during a same time period), for example,if the higher layer parameter usage is set to an indication, such as‘BeamManagement’ and/or the like. The wireless device may not send(e.g., transmit), in a given time instant in the BWP, the first SRSresource of the first SRS resource set and the fourth SRS resource ofthe second SRS resource set simultaneously, for example, based on thefirst time domain behavior of the first SRS resource and the fourth timedomain behavior of the fourth SRS resource being different.

A second time domain behavior of the second SRS resource and a fourthtime domain behavior of the fourth SRS resource may be the same in aBWP. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), in a given timeinstant in the BWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRS resourceset and the fourth SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously or during a same timeperiod). The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), in a given timeinstant in the BWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRS resourceset and the fourth SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously or during a same timeperiod), for example, if the higher layer parameter usage is set to anindication, such as ‘BeamManagement’ and/or the like. The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit), in a given time instant in the BWP,the second SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and the fourth SRSresource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (or substantiallysimultaneously or during a same time period), for example, based on thesecond time domain behavior of the second SRS resource and the fourthtime domain behavior of the fourth SRS resource being the same.

A second time domain behavior of the second SRS resource and a thirdtime domain behavior of the third SRS resource may be different in aBWP. The wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit), in a given timeinstant in the BWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRS resourceset and the third SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously or during a same timeperiod). The wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit), in a giventime instant in the BWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRSresource set and the third SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously or during a same timeperiod), for example, if the higher layer parameter usage is set to anindication, such as ‘BeamManagement’ and/or the like. The wirelessdevice may not send (e.g., transmit), in a given time instant in theBWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRS resource set and the thirdSRS resource of the second SRS resource set simultaneously (orsubstantially simultaneously or during a same time period), for example,based on the second time domain behavior of the second SRS resource andthe third time domain behavior of the third SRS resource beingdifferent.

The higher layer parameter SRS-Resource may configure (e.g.,semi-statically) at least one of: an SRS resource index (e.g., providedby a higher layer parameter srs-ResourceId) indicating a configurationof an SRS resource; a time domain behavior of the configuration of theSRS resource (e.g., indicated by a higher layer parameter resourceType);an SRS sequence ID (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersequenceId; and a configuration of a spatial relation between areference RS and a target SRS. The base station may configure thewireless device with a higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo. Thehigher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo may comprise an index (ID) ofthe reference RS. The domain behavior of an SRS resource may beaperiodic transmission, a semi-persistent transmission, or an aperiodicSRS transmission. A time domain behavior of an SRS resource may comprisea transmission periodicity, a transmission offset of the SRS resource,etc.

The wireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) indicating a serving cell may be present in anotherhigher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo). The wireless devicemay determine that the reference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock, CSI-RS) configured on the serving cell. The wireless device maydetermine that the reference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block,CSI-RS) configured on the serving cell, for example, based ondetermining that a higher layer parameter servingCellId indicating aserving cell may be present in the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo.

The wireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,uplinkBWP) indicating an uplink BWP and a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) indicating a serving cell may be present in the higherlayer parameter spatialRelationInfo. The wireless device may determinethat the reference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on theuplink BWP of the serving cell. The wireless device may determine thatthe reference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on the uplinkBWP of the serving cell, for example, based on determining that a higherlayer parameter (e.g., uplinkBWP) indicating an uplink BWP and a higherlayer parameter (e.g., servingCellId) indicating a serving cell may bepresent in another higher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

The base station may configure the target SRS on a serving cell. Thewireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) may be absent in a higher layer parameter (e.g.,spatialRelationInfo). The wireless device may determine that thereference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) configuredon the serving cell. The wireless device may determine that thereference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) configuredon the serving cell, for example, based on determining that a higherlayer parameter (e.g., servingCellId) may be absent in a higher layerparameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

The base station may configure the target SRS on a serving cell. Thewireless device may determine that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) is absent and a higher layer parameter (e.g., uplinkBWP)indicating an uplink BWP is present in another higher layer parameter(e.g., spatialRelationInfo). The wireless device may determine that thereference RS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on the uplink BWPthe serving cell. The wireless device may determine that the referenceRS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on the uplink BWP theserving cell, based on determining that a higher layer parameter (e.g.,servingCellId) is absent and a higher layer parameter (e.g., uplinkBWP)indicating an uplink BWP is present in another higher layer parameter(e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) PUSCH and SRS in a sameslot. The base station may configure the wireless device to send (e.g.,transmit) the SRS. The base station may configure the wireless device tosend (e.g., transmit) the SRS, for example, based on sending (e.g.,transmitting) the PUSCH and SRS in the same slot. The base station mayconfigure the wireless device to send (e.g., transmit) the SRS, forexample, based on the transmission of the PUSCH (and the correspondingDM-RS).

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more SRSresource configurations. A higher layer parameter (e.g., resourceType)in a higher layer SRS parameter (e.g., SRS-Resource) may be set to“periodic”. The base station may configure the wireless device with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo). The higher layerparameter spatialRelationInfo may comprise an ID of a reference RS(e.g., ssb-Index, csi-RS-Index, srs).

The reference RS may be a SS/PBCH block. The reference RS may be aCSI-RS (e.g., periodic CSI-RS, semi-persistent CSI-RS, aperiodicCSI-RS). The wireless device may use a spatial domain receiving filterto receive the reference RS. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) a target SRS resource with a spatial domain transmissionfilter same as the spatial domain receiving filter. The wireless devicemay send (e.g., transmit) a target SRS resource with a spatial domaintransmission filter same as the spatial domain receiving filter, forexample, based on the higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfoindicating the reference RS (e.g., by the ID of the reference RS) beingthe SS/PBCH block or the CSI-RS. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) a target SRS resource with the spatial domain receivingfilter. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a target SRSresource with the spatial domain receiving filter, for example, based ona higher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo) indicating thereference RS (e.g., by the ID of the reference RS),

The reference RS may be an SRS (e.g., periodic SRS, semi-persistent SRS,aperiodic SRS). The wireless device may use a spatial domaintransmission filter to send (e.g., transmit) the reference RS. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a target SRS resource with thespatial domain transmission filter. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) a target SRS resource with the spatial domain transmissionfilter, for example, based on a higher layer parameter (e.g.,spatialRelationInfo) indicating the reference RS (e.g., by the ID of thereference RS) being the SRS,

The base station may activate and/or deactivate one or more configuredSRS resource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets) of a servingcell. The base station may activate and/or deactivate one or moreconfigured SRS resource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets)of a serving cell, for example, by sending an SP SRSActivation/Deactivation MAC CE. The one or more configured SRS resourcesets may be initially deactivated upon configuration. The one or moreconfigured SRS resource sets may be deactivated based on a handover.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more SRSresource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets). A higher layerparameter (e.g., resourceType) in a higher layer SRS parameter (e.g.,SRS-Resource) may be set to an indication of “semi-persistent” and/orthe like. The wireless device may receive an activation command (e.g.,SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE). The wireless device may receivean activation command (e.g., SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE), forexample, for an SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets.The wireless device may receive an activation command (e.g., SP SRSActivation/Deactivation MAC CE), for example, from the base station. APDSCH may carry the activation command. The wireless device may send(e.g., transmit) an HARQ-ACK. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) an HARQ-ACK, for example, for the PDSCH in a slot n. Thewireless device may use one or more assumptions/actions for an SRStransmission of the SRS resource set starting from the slot n+3N_(slot)^(subframe,μ+1). The wireless device may use one or moreassumptions/actions for an SRS transmission of the SRS resource setstarting from the slot n+3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ+1), for example, basedon sending (e.g., transmitting) the HARQ-ACK for the PDSCH in the slotn. The activation command may comprise one or more spatial relationassumptions. The activation command may comprise one or more spatialrelation assumptions, for example, for one or more SRS resources of theSRS resource set. A first field (e.g., Resource IDi) in the activationcommand may comprise an identifier of a resource (e.g., SS/PBCH block,NZP CSI-RS, SRS) used for spatial relationship derivation. A first field(e.g., Resource IDi) in the activation command may comprise anidentifier of a resource (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS, SRS) used forspatial relationship derivation, for example, for an SRS resource of theone or more SRS resources. The one or more spatial relation assumptionsmay be provided by a list of references to one or more reference signalIDs (e.g., SSB-Index, SRS-ResourceId, etc.). The one or more spatialrelation assumptions may be provided on the basis of one spatialrelation assumption per SRS resource of the (activated) SRS resourceset. A spatial relation assumption of the one or more spatial relationassumption may be provided by a reference to an ID of a reference RS.The reference RS may be SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource, or SRS.

A Resource Serving Cell ID field indicating a serving cell may bepresent in the activation command. The reference RS may be an SS/PBCHblock resource or a NZP CSI-RS resource. The reference RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock, NZP CSI-RS resource) may be configured on the serving cell. Thereference RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource) may beconfigured on the serving cell, for example, based on the ResourceServing Cell ID field being present and the reference RS being theSS/PBCH block resource or the NZP CSI-RS resource.

The base station may configure the (activated) SRS resource set on aserving cell. A Resource Serving Cell ID field may be absent in theactivation command. The reference RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RSresource) may be configured on the serving cell. The reference RS (e.g.,SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource) may be configured on the servingcell, for example, based on the Resource Serving Cell ID field beingabsent and/or the base station configuring the SRS resource set on theserving cell.

A Resource Serving Cell ID field indicating a serving cell and aResource BWP ID field indicating an uplink BWP may be present in theactivation command. The reference RS (e.g., SRS resource) may beconfigured on the uplink BWP of the serving cell. The reference RS(e.g., SRS resource) may be configured on the uplink BWP of the servingcell, for example, based on the Resource Serving Cell ID field and theResource BWP ID field being present.

The base station may configure the SRS resource set on an uplink BWP ofa serving cell. A Resource Serving Cell ID field and a Resource BWP IDfield may be absent in the activation command. The reference RS (e.g.,SRS resource) may be configured on the uplink BWP of the serving cell.The reference RS (e.g., SRS resource) may be configured on the uplinkBWP of the serving cell, for example, based on the Resource Serving CellID field and the Resource BWP ID field being absent and the SRS resourceset being configured on the uplink BWP of the serving cell.

The base station may configure an SRS resource in the (activated) SRSresource set with a higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo. Thewireless device may assume that a reference RS (e.g., indicated by an IDof the reference RS) in the activation command overrides a secondreference RS configured in the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo. The wireless device may assume/determine that areference RS (e.g., indicated by an ID of the reference RS) in theactivation command overrides a second reference RS configured in ahigher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo), for example, basedon the SRS resource, in the (activated) SRS resource set, beingconfigured with the higher layer parameter (e.g., spatialRelationInfo).

The wireless device may receive a deactivation command (e.g., SP SRSActivation/Deactivation MAC CE). The wireless device may receive adeactivation command (e.g., SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE), forexample, from the base station. The wireless device may receive adeactivation command (e.g., SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE), forexample, for an (activated) SRS resource set of the one or more SRSresource sets. A PDSCH may carry the deactivation command. The wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit) an HARQ-ACK for the PDSCH in a slot n.The wireless device may use one or more assumptions/actions for acessation of an SRS transmission of the (deactivated) SRS resource setstarting from the slot n+3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ+1). The wireless devicemay use one or more assumptions/actions for a cessation of an SRStransmission of the (deactivated) SRS resource set starting from theslot n+3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ+1), for example, based on sending (e.g.,transmitting) the HARQ-ACK for the PDSCH in the slot n.

A wireless device may activate a semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration on an uplink BWP of a serving cell. A wireless device mayactivate a semi-persistent SRS resource configuration on an uplink BWPof a serving cell, for example, based on receiving, from a base station,an activation command for the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration.

The wireless device may not receive, from the base station, adeactivation command for the semi-persistent SRS resource configuration.The uplink BWP may be an active uplink BWP of the serving cell. Thewireless device may consider the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration active. The wireless device may consider thesemi-persistent SRS resource configuration active, for example, based onthe uplink BWP being the active uplink BWP of the serving cell and notreceiving the deactivation command for the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRStransmission. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRStransmission, for example, according to the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRStransmission, for example, via the uplink BWP of the serving cell. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRS transmission, forexample, based on considering the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration active.

The uplink BWP may not be an active uplink BWP of the serving cell. Theuplink BWP not being the active uplink BWP may comprise the uplink BWPbeing deactivated in the serving cell. The wireless device mayassume/determine that the semi-persistent SRS configuration is suspendedin the UL BWP of the serving cell. The wireless device mayassume/determine that the semi-persistent SRS configuration is suspendedin the UL BWP of the serving cell, for example, based on not receivingthe deactivation command for the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration and the uplink BWP being deactivated. The semi-persistentSRS configuration being suspended in the UL BWP may comprise that thewireless device may reactivate the semi-persistent SRS configuration.The semi-persistent SRS configuration being suspended in the UL BWP maycomprise that the wireless device may reactivate the semi-persistent SRSconfiguration, for example, if the UL BWP becomes an active UL BWP ofthe serving cell.

A first SRS resource of an SRS resource set may have a first time domainbehavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic). A second SRSresource of the SRS resource set may have a second time domain behavior(e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic). The wireless device mayexpect/determine that the first time domain behavior and the second timebehavior are the same. The wireless device may expect/determine that thefirst time domain behavior and the second time behavior are the same,for example, based on the first SRS resource and the second SRS resourcebeing in the (same) SRS resource set. The wireless device may notexpect/not determine that the first time domain behavior and the secondtime behavior are different. The wireless device may not expect/notdetermine that the first time domain behavior and the second timebehavior are different, for example, based on the first SRS resource andthe second SRS resource being in the (same) SRS resource set.

An SRS resource of an SRS resource set may have a first time domainbehavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic). The SRS resourceset may have a second time domain behavior (e.g., periodic,semi-persistent, aperiodic). The wireless device may expect/determinethat the first time domain behavior and the second time behavior are thesame. The wireless device may expect/determine that the first timedomain behavior and the second time behavior are the same, for example,based on the SRS resource being associated with the SRS resource set.The wireless device may not expect/not determine that the first timedomain behavior and the second time behavior are different. The wirelessdevice may not expect/not determine that the first time domain behaviorand the second time behavior are different, for example, based on theSRS resource and the SRS resource set being associated. The SRS resourcebeing associated with the SRS resource set may comprise that the SRSresource set comprises the SRS resource. The SRS resource beingassociated with the SRS resource set may comprise that the SRS resourceis an element of the SRS resource set.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH. A basestation may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH, for example, on atleast one first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL). The PUCCH maycarry/comprise one or more CSI reports. The PUCCH may carry/comprise oneor more L1-RSRP reports. The PUCCH may carry/comprise HARQ-ACK and/orSR. The base station may configure the wireless device with an SRSconfiguration on the carrier. The SRS configuration may be asemi-persistent SRS configuration. The SRS configuration may be aperiodic SRS configuration. The wireless device may determine that thePUCCH and an SRS transmission of the SRS configuration overlap in atleast one symbol. The wireless device may determine that the at leastone first symbol of the PUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRStransmission of the SRS configuration may overlap in the at least onesymbol. The wireless device may not perform the SRS transmission, on thecarrier, on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may not performthe SRS transmission, on the carrier, on the at least one symbol, forexample, based on determining that the at least one first symbol of thePUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRS transmission of the SRSconfiguration may overlap in the at least one symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH. A basestation may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH, for example, on atleast one first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL). The PUCCH maycarry/comprise HARQ-ACK and/or SR. The base station may trigger an SRSconfiguration on the carrier. The SRS configuration may be an aperiodicSRS configuration. The wireless device may determine that the PUCCH andan SRS transmission of the SRS configuration overlap in at least onesymbol. The wireless device may determine that the at least one firstsymbol of the PUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRStransmission of the SRS configuration may overlap in the at least onesymbol. The wireless device may not perform the SRS transmission, on thecarrier, on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may not performthe SRS transmission, on the carrier, on the at least one symbol, forexample, based on determining that the at least one first symbol of thePUCCH and/or at least one second symbol of the SRS transmission of theSRS configuration may overlap in the at least one symbol. The notperforming the SRS transmission may comprise dropping the SRStransmission on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may performthe SRS transmission on at least one third symbol of the at least onesecond symbol. The at least one third symbol may not overlap with the atleast one symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH. A basestation may configure a wireless device with a PUCCH, for example, on atleast one first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL). The PUCCH maycarry/comprise one or more semi-persistent CSI reports. The PUCCH maycarry/comprise one or more periodic CSI reports. The PUCCH maycarry/comprise one or more semi-persistent L1-RSRP reports. The PUCCHmay carry/comprise one or more periodic L1-RSRP reports. The basestation may trigger an SRS configuration on the carrier. The SRSconfiguration may be an aperiodic SRS configuration. The wireless devicemay determine that the PUCCH and an SRS transmission of the SRSconfiguration overlap in at least one symbol. The wireless device maydetermine that the at least one first symbol of the PUCCH and at leastone second symbol of the SRS transmission of the SRS configuration beingthe aperiodic SRS configuration may overlap in the at least one symbol.The wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) the PUCCH, on thecarrier, on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may not send(e.g., transmit) the PUCCH, on the carrier, on the at least one symbol,for example, based on determining that the at least one first symbol ofthe PUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRS transmission of theSRS configuration being the aperiodic SRS configuration may overlap inthe at least one symbol.

A wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRS and a PUCCH/PUSCHsimultaneously. A wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRSand a PUCCH/PUSCH simultaneously, for example, in an intra-band CA or inan inter-band CA band-band combination. A base station may not configurethe wireless device with an SRS transmission from a first carrier and aPUCCH/PUSCH (e.g., PUSCH/UL DM-RS/UL PT-RS/PUCCH formats) in a secondcarrier in the same symbol. A base station may not configure thewireless device with an SRS transmission from a first carrier and aPUCCH/PUSCH (e.g., PUSCH/UL DM-RS/UL PT-RS/PUCCH formats) in a secondcarrier in the same symbol, for example, based on not sending (e.g.,transmitting) the SRS and the PUCCH/PUSCH simultaneously. The firstcarrier may be different from the second carrier.

A wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRS and a PRACHsimultaneously. A wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRSand a PRACH simultaneously, for example, in an intra-band CA or in aninter-band CA band-band combination. The wireless device may not send(e.g., transmit) an SRS from a first carrier and a PRACH from a secondcarrier simultaneously. The wireless device may not send (e.g.,transmit) an SRS from a first carrier and a PRACH from a second carriersimultaneously (or substantially simultaneously or during a same timeperiod), for example, based on not sending (e.g., transmitting) the SRSand the PRACH simultaneously. The first carrier may be different fromthe second carrier.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a periodic SRStransmission. A base station may configure a wireless device with aperiodic SRS transmission, for example, on at least one symbol (e.g.,OFDM symbol). The base station may configure an SRS resource with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., resourceType) set as an indication, suchas ‘aperiodic’ and/or the like. The base station may trigger the SRSresource on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the (aperiodic) SRS resource on the (overlapped) at least onesymbol. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the (aperiodic)SRS resource on the (overlapped) at least one symbol, for example, basedon the SRS resource with the higher layer parameter resourceType set toan indication of ‘aperiodic,’ and/or the like, being triggered on the atleast one symbol configured with the periodic SRS transmission. Thewireless device may not perform the periodic SRS transmission on the atleast one symbol. The wireless device may not perform the periodic SRStransmission on the at least one symbol, for example, based on the SRSresource with the higher layer parameter resourceType set as anindication of ‘aperiodic,’ and/or the like, being triggered on the atleast one symbol configured with the periodic SRS transmission. The notperforming the periodic SRS transmission may comprise that the wirelessdevice may not send (e.g., transmit) an SRS associated with the periodicSRS transmission on the (overlapped) at least one symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a semi-persistentSRS transmission. A base station may configure a wireless device with asemi-persistent SRS transmission, for example, on at least one symbol(e.g., OFDM symbol). The base station may configure an SRS resource witha higher layer parameter (e.g., resourceType) set to an indication suchas ‘aperiodic and/or the like’. The base station may trigger the SRSresource on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the (aperiodic) SRS resource on the (overlapped) at least onesymbol. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the (aperiodic)SRS resource on the (overlapped) at least one symbol, for example, basedon the SRS resource with the higher layer parameter resourceType set toan indication such as ‘aperiodic,’ and/or the like, being triggered onthe at least one symbol configured with the semi-persistent SRStransmission. The wireless device may not perform the semi-persistentSRS transmission on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may notperform the semi-persistent SRS transmission on the at least one symbol,for example, based on the SRS resource with the higher layer parameterresourceType set to an indication such as ‘aperiodic,’ and/or the like,being triggered on the at least one symbol configured with thesemi-persistent SRS transmission. The not performing the semi-persistentSRS transmission may comprise that the wireless device may not send(e.g., transmit) an SRS associated with the semi-persistent SRStransmission on the (overlapped) at least one symbol.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a periodic SRStransmission. A base station may configure a wireless device with aperiodic SRS transmission, for example, on at least one symbol (e.g.,OFDM symbol). The base station may configure an SRS resource with ahigher layer parameter resourceType set to an indication such as‘semi-persistent,’ and/or the like. The base station may trigger the SRSresource on the at least one symbol. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the (semi-persistent) SRS resource on the (overlapped) atleast one symbol. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the(semi-persistent) SRS resource on the (overlapped) at least one symbol,for example, based on the SRS resource with the higher layer parameterresourceType set to an indication such as ‘semi-persistent,’ and/or thelike, being triggered on the at least one symbol configured with theperiodic SRS transmission. The wireless device may not perform theperiodic SRS transmission on the at least one symbol. The wirelessdevice may not perform the periodic SRS transmission on the at least onesymbol, for example, based on the SRS resource with the higher layerparameter resourceType set to an indication such as ‘semi-persistent,’and/or the like, being triggered on the at least one symbol configuredwith the periodic SRS transmission. The not performing the periodic SRStransmission may comprise that the wireless device may not send (e.g.,transmit) an SRS associated with the periodic SRS transmission on the(overlapped) at least one symbol.

A wireless device may be configured with one or more serving cells. Awireless device may be configured with one or more serving cells, forexample, by a base station. The base station may activate one or moresecond serving cells of the one or more serving cells. The base stationmay configure each activated serving cell of the one or more secondserving cells with a respective PDCCH monitoring. The wireless devicemay monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs on anactive DL BWP of each activated serving cell configured with therespective PDCCH monitoring. The wireless device may monitor the set ofPDCCH candidates in the one or more CORESETs according to correspondingsearch space sets. The monitoring may comprise decoding each PDCCHcandidate of the set of PDCCH candidates according to monitored DCIformats.

A set of PDCCH candidates for a wireless device to monitor may bedefined in terms of PDCCH search space sets. A search space set may be acommon search space (CSS) set or a wireless device specific search space(USS) set.

One or more PDCCH monitoring occasions may be associated with a SS/PBCHblock. The SS/PBCH block may be QCLed with a CSI-RS. A TCI state of anactive BWP may comprise the CSI-RS. The active BWP may comprise aCORESET identified with index being equal to zero (e.g., CORESET zero).The wireless device may determine the TCI state by the most recent of:an indication by a MAC CE activation command or a random accessprocedure that is not initiated by a PDCCH order that triggers anon-contention based random access procedure. A wireless device maymonitor corresponding PDCCH candidates at the one or more PDCCHmonitoring occasions. A wireless device may monitor corresponding PDCCHcandidates at the one or more PDCCH monitoring occasions, for example,for a DCI format with CRC scrambled by a C-RNTI. A wireless device maymonitor corresponding PDCCH candidates at the one or more PDCCHmonitoring occasions, for example, based on the one or more PDCCHmonitoring occasions being associated with the SS/PBCH block.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more DL BWPsin a serving cell. The wireless device may be provided by a higher layersignaling with one or more (e.g., 2, 3) CORESETs. The wireless devicemay be provided by a higher layer signaling with one or more (e.g., 2,3) CORESETs, for example, for a DL BWP of the one or more DL BWPs. For aCORESET of the one or more CORESETs, the base station may provide thewireless device, by a higher layer parameter (e.g., ControlResourceSet),at least one of: a CORESET index (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter controlResourceSetId), a DM-RS scrambling sequenceinitialization value (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterpdcch-DMRS-ScramblingID); a number/quantity of consecutive symbols(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter duration), a set of resourceblocks (e.g., provided by higher layer parameterfrequencyDomainResources), CCE-to-REG mapping parameters (e.g., providedby higher layer parameter cce-REG-MappingType), an antenna port QCL(e.g., from a set of antenna port QCLs provided by a first higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and a second higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList), and an indication for a presence and/orabsence of a TCI field for a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1) sent(e.g., transmitted) by a PDCCH in the CORESET (e.g., provided by higherlayer parameter TCI-PresentInDCI). The antenna port QCL may indicate aQCL information (QCL-Info) of one or more DM-RS antenna ports for aPDCCH reception in the CORESET. The CORESET index may be unique amongthe one or more DL BWPs of the serving cell. The wireless device mayconsider/determine that a TCI field is absent/disabled in the DCIformat. The wireless device may consider/determine that a TCI field isabsent/disabled in the DCI format, for example, if a higher layerparameter (e.g., TCI-PresentInDCI) is absent.

A first higher layer parameter (e.g., tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) and asecond higher layer parameter (e.g., tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList) mayprovide a subset of TCI states defined in a configuration (e.g.,pdsch-Config). The wireless device may use the subset of the TCI statesto provide one or more QCL relationships between one or more RS in a TCIstate of the subset of the TCI states and one or more DM-RS ports of aPDCCH reception in the CORESET.

A base station may configure a CORESET for a wireless device. A CORESETindex (e.g., provided by higher layer parameter such ascontrolResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be non-zero. The base stationmay not provide the wireless device with a configuration of one or moreTCI states for the CORESET. The base station may not provide thewireless device with a configuration of one or more TCI states for theCORESET, for example, by a first higher layer parameter (e.g.,tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) and/or a second higher layer parameter (e.g.,tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). The wireless device may assume/determinethat one or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in theCORESET is QCLed with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block). The wireless devicemay assume/determine that one or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCHreception in the CORESET is QCLed with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block), forexample, based on not being provided with the configuration of the oneor more TCI states for the CORESET. The wireless device mayidentify/indicate the RS in an initial access procedure.

A base station may configure a CORESET for a wireless device. A CORESETindex (e.g., provided by higher layer parameter such ascontrolResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be non-zero. The base stationmay provide the wireless device with an initial configuration of atleast two TCI states for the CORESET. The base station may provide thewireless device with an initial configuration of at least two TCI statesfor the CORESET, for example, by a first higher layer parameter (e.g.,tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) and/or a second higher layer parameter (e.g.,tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). The wireless device may receive theinitial configuration of the at least two TCI states from the basestation. The wireless device may not receive a MAC CE activation commandfor at least one of the at least two TCI states for the CORESET. Thewireless device may assume/determine that one or more DM-RS antennaports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET is QCLed with an RS (e.g.,SS/PBCH block). The wireless device may assume that one or more DM-RSantenna ports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET is QCLed with an RS(e.g., SS/PBCH block), for example, based on being provided with theinitial configuration for the CORESET and not receiving the MAC CEactivation command for the CORESET. The wireless device mayidentify/indicate the RS in an initial access procedure.

A base station may configure a CORESET for a wireless device. A CORESETindex (e.g., provided by higher layer parameter such ascontrolResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be equal to zero. The wirelessdevice may not receive a MAC CE activation command for a TCI state forthe CORESET. The wireless device may assume/determine that one or moreDM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET is QCLed withan RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block). The wireless device may assume/determinethat one or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in theCORESET is QCLed with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block), for example, based onnot receiving the MAC CE activation command. The wireless device mayidentify/indicate the RS in an initial access procedure. The wirelessdevice may identify/indicate the RS from a most recent random accessprocedure. The wireless device may not initiate the most recent randomaccess procedure. The wireless device may not initiate the most recentrandom access procedure, for example, based on receiving a PDCCH ordertriggering a non-contention based random access procedure.

A base station may provide a wireless device with a single TCI state fora CORESET. The base station may provide the single TCI state by a firsthigher layer parameter (e.g., tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList) and/or a secondhigher layer parameter (e.g., tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). Thewireless device may assume that one or more DM-RS antenna ports for aPDCCH reception in the CORESET is QCLed with one or more DL RSsconfigured by the single TCI state. The wireless device may assume thatone or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET isQCLed with one or more DL RSs configured by the single TCI state, forexample, based on being provided with the single TCI state for theCORESET.

A base station may configure a CORESET for a wireless device. The basestation may provide the wireless device with a configuration of at leasttwo TCI states for the CORESET. The base station may provide thewireless device with a configuration of at least two TCI states for theCORESET, for example, by a first higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and/or a second higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList. The wireless device may receive theconfiguration of the at least two TCI states from the base station. Thewireless device may receive a MAC CE activation command for at least oneof the at least two TCI states for the CORESET. The wireless device mayassume/determine that one or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCHreception in the CORESET is QCLed with one or more DL RSs configured bythe at least one of the at least two TCI states. The wireless device mayassume/determine that one or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCHreception in the CORESET is QCLed with one or more DL RSs configured bythe at least one of the at least two TCI states, for example, based onreceiving the MAC CE activation command for the at least one of the atleast two TCI states.

A base station may configure a CORESET for a wireless device. A CORESETindex (e.g., provided by higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId) ofthe CORESET may be equal to zero. The base station may provide thewireless device with a configuration of at least two TCI states for theCORESET. The wireless device may receive the configuration of the atleast two TCI states from the base station. The wireless device mayreceive a MAC CE activation command for at least one of the at least twoTCI states for the CORESET. The wireless device may expect/determinethat a QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD) of a first RS (e.g., CSI-RS) in the atleast one of the at least two TCI states is provided by a second RS(e.g., SS/PBCH block). The wireless device may expect/determine that aQCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD) of a first RS (e.g., CSI-RS) in the at leastone of the at least two TCI states is provided by a second RS (e.g.,SS/PBCH block), for example, based on the CORESET index being equal tozero. The wireless device may expect/determine that a QCL type (e.g.,QCL-TypeD) of a first RS (e.g., CSI-RS) in the at least one of the atleast two TCI states is spatial QCLed with a second RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock). The wireless device may expect/determine that a QCL type (e.g.,QCL-TypeD) of a first RS (e.g., CSI-RS) in the at least one of the atleast two TCI states is spatial QCLed with a second RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock), for example, based on the CORESET index being equal to zero.

A wireless device may receive a MAC CE activation command. A wirelessdevice may receive a MAC CE activation command, for example, for atleast one of at least two TCI states for a CORESET. A PDSCH (e.g., aPDSCH transmission) may provide the MAC CE activation command. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a HARQ-ACK information for thePDSCH (e.g., PDSCH transmission) in a slot. The wireless device may usethe MAC CE activation command. The wireless device may use the MAC CEactivation command, for example, if the wireless device receives the MACCE activation command for the at least one of the at least two TCIstates for the CORESET. The wireless device may use the MAC CEactivation command, for example, based on sending (e.g., transmitting)HARQ-ACK information in the slot. The wireless device may use the MAC CEactivation command, for example, after (e.g., 3 msec, 5 msec, or anyother duration) and/or based on (e.g., in response to) the slot. A firstBWP may be active in the second slot. A first BWP may be active in thesecond slot, for example, if the wireless device applies the MAC CEactivation command in a second slot. The first BWP may be an active BWP.The first BWP may be an active BWP, for example, based on the first BWPbeing active in the second slot.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more DL BWPsin a serving cell. The wireless device may be provided by higher layerswith one or more (e.g., 3, 5, 10, or any other quantity) search spacesets. The wireless device may be provided by higher layers with one ormore (e.g., 3, 5, 10, or any other quantity) search space sets, forexample, for a DL BWP of the one or more DL BWPs. For a search space setof the one or more search space sets, the wireless device may beprovided, by a higher layer parameter (e.g., SearchSpace), at least oneof: a search space set index (e.g., provided by higher layer parametersearchSpaceId), an association between the search space set and aCORESET (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter such ascontrolResourceSetId); a PDCCH monitoring periodicity of a first numberof slots and a PDCCH monitoring offset of a second number/quantity ofslots (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter such asmonitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset); a PDCCH monitoring pattern within aslot, indicating first symbol(s) of the CORESET within the slot forPDCCH monitoring, (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter such asmonitoringSymbolsWithinSlot); a duration of a third number/quantity ofslots (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter duration); anumber/quantity of PDCCH candidates; an indication that the search spaceset is either a common search space set or a wireless device-specificsearch space set (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersearchSpaceType). The duration may indicate a number/quantity of slotsthat the search space set may exist.

A wireless device may not expect/determine two PDCCH monitoringoccasions on an active DL BWP in a same CORESET to be separated by anon-zero number of symbols that is smaller than the CORESET duration. Awireless device may not expect/determine two PDCCH monitoring occasionson an active DL BWP in a same CORESET to be separated by a non-zeronumber of symbols that is smaller than the CORESET duration, forexample, for a same search space set or for different search space sets.The wireless device may determine a PDCCH monitoring occasion on anactive DL BWP. The wireless device may determine a PDCCH monitoringoccasion on an active DL BWP, for example, based on the PDCCH monitoringperiodicity, the PDCCH monitoring offset, and the PDCCH monitoringpattern within a slot. The wireless device may determine that a PDCCHmonitoring occasion exists in a slot. The wireless device may determinethat a PDCCH monitoring occasion exists in a slot, for example, for thesearch space set. The wireless device may monitor at least one PDCCH forthe search space set for the duration of third number/quantity of slots(e.g., consecutive) starting from the slot.

A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates. A wirelessdevice may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates, for example, in a USSset on an active DL BWP of a serving cell. A base station may notconfigure the wireless device with a carrier indicator field. Thewireless device may monitor the one or more PDCCH candidates without thecarrier indicator field. The wireless device may monitor the one or morePDCCH candidates without the carrier indicator field, for example, basedon not being configured with the carrier indicator field.

A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates. A wirelessdevice may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates, for example, in a USSset on an active DL BWP of a serving cell. A base station may configurethe wireless device with a carrier indicator field. The wireless devicemay monitor the one or more PDCCH candidates with the carrier indicatorfield. The wireless device may monitor the one or more PDCCH candidateswith the carrier indicator field, for example, based on being configuredwith the carrier indicator field.

A base station may configure a wireless device to monitor one or morePDCCH candidates with a carrier indicator field in a first cell. Thecarrier indicator field may indicate a second cell. The carrierindicator field may correspond to a second cell. The wireless device maynot expect/determine not to monitor the one or more PDCCH candidates onan active DL BWP of the second cell. The wireless device may notexpect/determine not to monitor the one or more PDCCH candidates on anactive DL BWP of the second cell, for example, based on monitoring theone or more PDCCH candidates, with the carrier indicator field, in thefirst cell, indicating the second cell.

A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates on an activeDL BWP of a serving cell. The wireless device may monitor the one ormore PDCCH candidates for the serving cell. The wireless device maymonitor the one or more PDCCH candidates for the serving cell, forexample, based on monitoring the one or more PDCCH candidates on theactive DL BWP of the serving cell.

A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates on an activeDL BWP of a serving cell. The wireless device may monitor the one ormore PDCCH candidates at least for the serving cell. The wireless devicemay monitor the one or more PDCCH candidates at least for the servingcell, for example, based on monitoring the one or more PDCCH candidateson the active DL BWP of the serving cell. The wireless device maymonitor the one or more PDCCH candidates for the serving cell and atleast a second serving cell.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more cells.The base station may configure the wireless device for a single-celloperation. The base station may configure the wireless device for asingle-cell operation, for example, if a number of the one or more cellsis one. The base station may configure the wireless device for anoperation with a CA in a same frequency band (e.g., intra-band). Thebase station may configure the wireless device for an operation with aCA in a same frequency band (e.g., intra-band), for example, if anumber/quantity of the one or more cells is more than one.

The wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates. Thewireless device may monitor one or more PDCCH candidates, for example,in overlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions in a plurality of CORESETs onactive DL BWP(s) of the one or more cells. The plurality of the CORESETsmay have a different QCL type property (e.g., QCL-TypeD property).

A first PDCCH monitoring occasion in a first CORESET, of the pluralityof CORESETs, of a first cell of the one or more cells may overlap with asecond PDCCH monitoring occasion in a second CORESET, of the pluralityof CORESETs, of the first cell. The wireless device may monitor at leastone first PDCCH candidate in the first PDCCH monitoring occasion on anactive DL BWP, of the active DL BWP(s), of the first cell. The wirelessdevice may monitor at least one second PDCCH candidate in the secondPDCCH monitoring occasion on the active DL BWP, of the active DL BWP(s),of the first cell.

A first PDCCH monitoring occasion in a first CORESET, of the pluralityof CORESETs, of a first cell of the one or more cells may overlap with asecond PDCCH monitoring occasion in a second CORESET, of the pluralityof CORESETs, of a second cell of the one or more cells. The wirelessdevice may monitor at least one first PDCCH candidate in the first PDCCHmonitoring occasion on a first active DL BWP, of the active DL BWP(s),of the first cell. The wireless device may monitor at least one secondPDCCH candidate in the second PDCCH monitoring occasion on a secondactive DL BWP, of the active DL BWP(s), of the second cell. A first QCLtype property (e.g., QCL-TypeD) of the first CORESET may be differentfrom a second QCL type property (e.g., QCL-TypeD) of the second CORESET.

A base station may indicate, to a wireless device, a TCI state. A basestation may indicate, to a wireless device, a TCI state, for example,for a PDCCH reception for a CORESET of a serving cell. A base stationmay indicate, to a wireless device, a TCI state, for example, by sendinga TCI state indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE. A basestation (e.g., a MAC entity of the base station) may indicate to lowerlayers (e.g., PHY) the information regarding the TCI state indicationfor the wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE. A MAC entity may indicateto lower layers (e.g., PHY) the information regarding the TCI stateindication for the wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE, for example,if the MAC entity of the wireless device receives a TCI state indicationfor wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE on/for a serving cell.

A TCI state indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE may beidentified/indicated by a MAC PDU subheader with LCID. The TCI stateindication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE may have a fixedsize of 16 bits (or any other quantity of bits) comprising one or morefields. The one or more fields may comprise a serving cell ID, a CORESETID, a TCI state ID, and/or a reserved bit. The serving cell ID mayindicate the identity of the serving cell for which the TCI stateindication for the wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE is used. Thelength of the serving cell ID may be n bits (e.g., n=5 bits or any otherquantity of bits).

The CORESET ID may indicate a CORESET. The CORESET may beidentified/indicated with a CORESET ID (e.g., ControlResourceSetId). TheTCI State may be indicated by the CORESET ID. The length of the CORESETID may be n3 bits (e.g., n3=4 bits, or any other quantity of bits). TheTCI state ID may indicate a TCI state identified/indicated byTCI-StateId. The TCI state may be applicable to the CORESETidentified/indicated by the CORESET ID. The length of the TCI state IDmay be n4 bits (e.g., n4=6 bits, or any other quantity of bits).

An information element ControlResourceSet may be used to configure atime/frequency CORESET. An information element ControlResourceSet may beused to configure a time/frequency CORESET, for example, in which tosearch for DCI. An information element TCI-State may associate one ortwo DL reference signals with a corresponding QCL type. The informationelement TCI-State may comprise one or more fields including TCI-StateIdand QCL-Info. The QCL-Info may comprise one or more second fields. Theone or more second fields may comprise serving cell index, BWP ID, areference signal index (e.g., SSB-index, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceID), and/ora QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeB, QCL-TypeC, QCL-TypeD). TheTCI-StateID may identify/indicate a configuration of a TCI state.

The serving cell index may indicate a serving cell. The serving cellindex may indicate a serving cell, for example, in which a referencesignal indicated by the reference signal index is located. Theinformation element TCI-State may be used for a serving cell in whichthe information element TCI-State is configured. The information elementTCI-State may be used for a serving cell in which the informationelement TCI-State is configured, for example, if the serving cell indexis absent in an information element TCI-State. The reference signal maybe located on a second serving cell other than the serving cell in whichthe information element TCI-State is configured. The reference signalmay be located on a second serving cell other than the serving cell inwhich the information element TCI-State is configured, for example, ifthe QCL-Type is configured as first type (e.g., TypeD, TypeA, TypeB).The BWP ID may indicate a downlink BWP of the serving cell in which thereference signal is located.

An information element SearchSpace may define/indicate how/where tosearch for PDCCH candidates in a search space. The search space may beidentified/indicated by a searchSpaceId field in the information elementSearchSpace. Each search space may be associated with a CORESET (e.g.,ControlResourceSet). The CORESET may be identified/indicated by a field(e.g., controlResourceSetId field) in the information elementSearchSpace. The controlResourceSetId field may indicate the CORESETapplicable for the SearchSpace.

A wireless device may be configured with a first set of BWPs (e.g., atmost four BWPs, or up to any other maximum quantity) for reception ofone or more signals. A wireless device may be configured with a firstset of BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs, or up to any other maximumquantity) for reception of one or more signals, for example, by higherlayers with a parameter such as BWP-Downlink. A wireless device may beconfigured with a first set of BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs, or up toany other maximum quantity) for reception, for example, in a DLbandwidth (e.g., DL BWP set) for the serving cell. A wireless device maybe configured with a first set of BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs, or upto any other maximum quantity) for reception, for example, if configuredfor operation in BWPs of a serving cell. A wireless device may beconfigured with a second set of BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs, or up toany other maximum quantity) for transmission of one or more signals. Awireless device may be configured with a second set of BWPs (e.g., atmost four BWPs, or up to any other maximum quantity) for transmission,for example, by higher layers with a parameter such as BWP-Uplink. Awireless device may be configured with a second set of BWPs (e.g., atmost four BWPs, or up to any other maximum quantity) for transmission,for example, in a UL bandwidth (e.g., UL BWP set) for the serving cell.A wireless device may be configured with a second set of BWPs (e.g., atmost four BWPs, or up to any other maximum quantity) for transmission,for example, if configured for operation in BWPs of a serving cell.

The base station may not provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as initialDownlinkBWP. An initial active DL BWP may bedefined/indicated. An initial active DL BWP may be defined/indicated,for example, based on not providing the wireless device with the higherlayer parameter such as initialDownlinkBWP. An initial active DL BWP maybe defined/indicated, for example, by a location, a number/quantity ofcontiguous PRBs, and/or a subcarrier spacing (SCS) and a cyclic prefixfor PDCCH reception in a CORESET for Type0-PDCCH common search space(CSS) set. The contiguous PRBs may start from a first PRB with a lowestindex among PRBs of the CORESET for a set (e.g., the Type0-PDCCH CSSset).

The base station may provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as initialDownlinkBWP. An initial active DL BWP may beprovided by the higher layer parameter such as initialDownlinkBWP. Aninitial active DL BWP may be provided by the higher layer parameter suchas initialDownlinkBWP. An initial active DL BWP may be provided by thehigher layer parameter such as initialDownlinkBWP, for example, based onproviding of a wireless device with a higher layer parameter such asinitialDownlinkBWP.

A base station may provide a wireless device with an initial active ULBWP by a higher layer parameter (e.g., initialUplinkBWP). A base stationmay provide a wireless device with an initial active UL BWP by a higherlayer parameter (e.g., initialUplinkBWP), for example, for operation ona cell (e.g., primary cell, secondary cell). The base station mayprovide the wireless device with a second initial active uplink BWP onthe supplementary uplink carrier by a second higher layer parameter(e.g., initialUplinkBWP in supplementaryUplink). The base station mayprovide the wireless device with a second initial active uplink BWP onthe supplementary uplink carrier by a second higher layer parameter(e.g., initialUplinkBWP in supplementaryUplink), for example, ifconfigured with a supplementary uplink carrier (SUL),

A wireless device may have a dedicated BWP configuration. The wirelessdevice may be provided by a higher layer parameter (e.g.,firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id). The wireless device may be provided by ahigher layer parameter (e.g., firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id), for example,based on the wireless device having the dedicated BWP configuration. Thehigher layer parameter may indicate a first active DL BWP forreceptions.

The wireless device may be provided by a higher layer parameter (e.g.,firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id). The wireless device may be provided by ahigher layer parameter (e.g., firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id), for example,based on the wireless device having the dedicated BWP configuration. Thehigher layer parameter may indicate a first active UL BWP fortransmissions on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL) of a serving cell (e.g.,primary cell, secondary cell).

A base station may configure a wireless device for a serving cell. Abase station may configure a wireless device for a serving cell (e.g.,for a DL BWP in a first set of BWPs and/or an UL BWP in a second set ofBWPs), with at least one of: a subcarrier spacing provided by a higherlayer parameter subcarrierSpacing; a cyclic prefix provided by a higherlayer parameter cyclicPrefix; an index in the first set of BWPs or inthe second set of BWPs by a higher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g.,bwp-Id); a third set of BWP-common and a fourth set of BWP-dedicatedparameters by a higher layer parameter such as bwp-Common and a higherlayer parameter such as bwp-Dedicated, respectively. The base stationmay configure (e.g., further configure) the wireless device for theserving cell with a common RB N_(BWP) ^(start)=O_(carrier)+RB_(start)and/or a number/quantity of contiguous RBs N_(BWP) ^(size)=L_(RB)provided by a higher layer parameter such as locationAndBandwidth. Thehigher layer parameter such as locationAndBandwidth may indicate anoffset RB_(start) and a length L_(RB) as Resource indicator value (RIV),setting N_(BWP) ^(size)=275, and a value O_(carrier) provided by ahigher layer parameter such as offsetToCarrier for the higher layerparameter such as subcarrierSpacing. A DL BWP, from a first set of BWPs,with a DL BWP index provided by a higher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g.,bwp-Id) may be linked with an UL BWP, from a second set of BWPs, with anUL BWP index provided by a higher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g., bwp-Id).A DL BWP, from a first set of BWPs, with a DL BWP index provided by ahigher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g., bwp-Id) may be linked with an ULBWP, from a second set of BWPs, with an UL BWP index provided by ahigher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g., bwp-Id), for example, for anunpaired spectrum operation. A DL BWP, from a first set of BWPs, with aDL BWP index provided by a higher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g., bwp-Id)may be linked with an UL BWP, from a second set of BWPs, with an UL BWPindex provided by a higher layer parameter bwp-Id (e.g., bwp-Id), forexample, if the DL BWP index of the DL BWP is same as the UL BWP indexof the UL BWP.

A DL BWP index of a DL BWP may be the same as an UL BWP index of an ULBWP. A wireless device may not expect (or determine not) to receive aconfiguration (e.g., RRC configuration). A wireless device may notexpect (or determine not) to receive a configuration (e.g., RRCconfiguration), for example, for an unpaired spectrum operation. Awireless device may not expect (or determine not) to receive aconfiguration (e.g., RRC configuration) in which a first centerfrequency for the DL BWP is different from a second center frequency forthe UL BWP, for example, based on the DL BWP index of the DL BWP beingthe same as the UL BWP index of the UL BWP. A base station may configurea wireless device with one or more CORESETs for every type (or at leastsome types) of common search space (CSS) sets and/or for wirelessdevice-specific search space (USS). A base station may configure awireless device with one or more CORESETs for every type (or at leastsome types) of common search space (CSS) sets and/or for wirelessdevice-specific search space (USS), for example, for a DL BWP in a firstset of BWPs on a serving cell (e.g., primary cell). The wireless devicemay not expect (or determine not) to be configured without a commonsearch space set on a primary cell (or on the PSCell). The wirelessdevice may not expect (or determine not) to be configured without acommon search space set on a primary cell (or on the PSCell), forexample, in an active DL BWP.

A base station may provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as controlResourceSetZero and a higher layer parametersuch as searchSpaceZero. A base station may provide a wireless devicewith a higher layer parameter such as controlResourceSetZero and ahigher layer parameter such as searchSpaceZero, for example, in a higherlayer parameter such as PDCCH-ConfigSIB1 and/or a higher layer parametersuch as PDCCH-ConfigCommon. The wireless device may determine a CORESETfor a search space set from the higher layer parameter such ascontrolResourcesetZero. The wireless device may determine a CORESET fora search space set from the higher layer parameter such ascontrolResourcesetZero, for example, based on providing a wirelessdevice with a higher layer parameter such as controlResourceSetZero anda higher layer parameter such as searchSpaceZero. The wireless devicemay determine corresponding PDCCH monitoring occasions. The wirelessdevice may determine corresponding PDCCH monitoring occasions, forexample, based on providing a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as controlResourceSetZero and a higher layer parametersuch as searchSpaceZero. An active DL BWP of a serving cell may not bean initial DL BWP of the serving cell. The wireless device may determinethe PDCCH monitoring occasions for the search space set. The wirelessdevice may determine the PDCCH monitoring occasions for the search spaceset, for example, if the active DL BWP is not the initial DL BWP of theserving cell. The wireless device may determine the PDCCH monitoringoccasions for the search space set, for example, based on a bandwidth ofthe CORESET being within the active DL BWP and the active DL BWP havingthe same SCS configuration and same cyclic prefix as the initial DL BWP.A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more resourcesets (e.g., time-frequency resources/occasions) for PUCCH transmissions.A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more resourcesets (e.g., time-frequency resources/occasions) for PUCCH transmissions,for example, for an UL BWP in a second set of BWPs of a serving cell(e.g., primary cell or PUCCH SCell).

A wireless device may receive PDCCH and PDSCH in a DL BWP. A wirelessdevice may receive PDCCH and PDSCH in a DL BWP, for example, accordingto a configured subcarrier spacing and CP length for the DL BWP. Awireless device may send (e.g., transmit) PUCCH and PUSCH in an UL BWP.A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) PUCCH and PUSCH in an ULBWP, for example, according to a configured subcarrier spacing and CPlength for the UL BWP.

A BWP indicator field may be configured in a DCI format (e.g., DCIformat 1_1). A value of the BWP indicator field may indicate an activeDL BWP. A value of the BWP indicator field may indicate an active DLBWP, for example, from a first set of BWPs, for one or more DLreceptions. The BWP indicator field may indicate a DL BWP different fromthe active DL BWP. The wireless device may set the DL BWP as a currentactive DL BWP. The wireless device may set the DL BWP as a currentactive DL BWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator field indicatingthe DL BWP different from the active DL BWP. The setting the DL BWP as acurrent active DL BWP may comprise activating the DL BWP anddeactivating the active DL BWP.

A BWP indicator field may be configured in a DCI format (e.g., DCIformat 0_1). A value of the BWP indicator field may indicate an activeUL BWP. A value of the BWP indicator field may indicate an active ULBWP, for example, from a second set of BWPs, for one or more ULtransmissions. The BWP indicator field may indicate an UL BWP differentfrom the active UL BWP. The wireless device may set the UL BWP as acurrent active UL BWP. The wireless device may set the UL BWP as acurrent active UL BWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator fieldindicating the UL BWP different from the active UL BWP. The setting theUL BWP as a current active UL BWP may comprise activating the UL BWP anddeactivating the active UL BWP.

A DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1) indicating an active DL BWP changemay comprise a time domain resource assignment field. The time domainresource assignment field may provide a slot offset value for a PDSCHreception. The slot offset value may be smaller than a delay required bya wireless device for the active DL BWP change. The wireless device maynot expect (or determine not) to detect the DCI format indicating theactive DL BWP change. The wireless device may not expect (or determinenot) to detect the DCI format indicating the active DL BWP change, forexample, based on the slot offset value being smaller than the delayrequired by the wireless device for the active DL BWP change.

A DCI format (e.g., DCI format 0_1) indicating an active UL BWP changemay comprise a time domain resource assignment field. The time domainresource assignment field may provide a slot offset value for a PUSCHtransmission. The slot offset value may be smaller than a delay requiredby a wireless device for the active UL BWP change. The wireless devicemay not expect (or determine not) to detect the DCI format indicatingthe active UL BWP change. The wireless device may not expect (ordetermine not) to detect the DCI format indicating the active UL BWPchange, for example, based on the slot offset value being smaller thanthe delay required by the wireless device for the active UL BWP change.

A wireless device may receive a PDCCH in a slot of a scheduling cell.The wireless device may detect a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1), inthe PDCCH of the scheduling cell. The wireless device may detect a DCIformat (e.g., DCI format 11), in the PDCCH of the scheduling cell, forexample, indicating an active DL BWP change for a serving cell. The DCIformat may comprise a time domain resource assignment field. The timedomain resource assignment field may provide a slot offset value for aPDSCH transmission. The slot offset value may indicate a second slot.The wireless device may not be required to receive or send (e.g.,transmit) in the serving cell for a time duration from the end of athird symbol of the slot until the beginning of the second slot. Thewireless device may not be required to receive or send (e.g., transmit)in the serving cell for a time duration from the end of a third symbolof the slot until the beginning of the second slot, for example, basedon detecting the DCI format indicating the active DL BWP change.

A wireless device may receive a PDCCH in a slot of a scheduling cell.The wireless device may detect a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 0_1). Thewireless device may detect a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 0_1), forexample, in the PDCCH of the scheduling cell, indicating an active ULBWP change for a serving cell. The DCI format may comprise a time domainresource assignment field. The time domain resource assignment field mayprovide a slot offset value for a PUSCH transmission. The slot offsetvalue may indicate a second slot. The wireless device may not berequired to receive or send (e.g., transmit) in the serving cell for atime duration from the end of a third symbol of the slot until thebeginning of the second slot. The wireless device may not be required toreceive or send (e.g., transmit) in the serving cell for a time durationfrom the end of a third symbol of the slot until the beginning of thesecond slot, for example, based on detecting the DCI format indicatingthe active UL BWP change.

A wireless device may expect/determine to detect a DCI format 0_1indicating active UL BWP change/switch. A wireless device mayexpect/determine to detect a DCI format 0_1 indicating active UL BWPchange/switch, for example, if a corresponding PDCCH for the detectedDCI format 0_1 is received within first 3 symbols of a slot. A wirelessdevice may expect/determine to detect a DCI format 1_1 indicating activeDL BWP change/switch. A wireless device may expect/determine to detect aDCI format 1_1 indicating active DL BWP change/switch, for example, if acorresponding PDCCH for the detected DCI format 1_1 is received withinfirst 3 symbols of a slot. A wireless device may not expect (ordetermine not) to detect a DCI format 0_1 indicating active UL BWPchange/switch. A wireless device may not expect (or determine not) todetect a DCI format 0_1 indicating active UL BWP change/switch, forexample, if a corresponding PDCCH is received based on the first 3symbols of a slot. A wireless device may not expect (or determine not)to detect a DCI format 1_1 indicating active DL BWP change/switch. Awireless device may not expect (or determine not) to detect a DCI format1_1 indicating active DL BWP change/switch, for example, if acorresponding PDCCH is received based on the first 3 symbols of a slot.

An active DL BWP change may comprise switching from the active DL BWP ofa serving cell to a DL BWP of the serving cell. The switching from theactive DL BWP to the DL BWP may comprise setting the DL BWP as a currentactive DL BWP and deactivating the active DL BWP. An active UL BWPchange may comprise switching from the active UL BWP of a serving cellto a UL BWP of the serving cell. The switching from the active UL BWP tothe UL BWP may comprise setting the UL BWP as a current active UL BWPand/or deactivating the active UL BWP.

A base station may provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as defaultDownlinkBWP-Id. A base station may provide awireless device with a higher layer parameter such asdefaultDownlinkBWP-Id, for example, for a serving cell (e.g., PCell,SCell). The higher layer parameter such as defaultDownlinkBWP-Id mayindicate a default DL BWP among the first set of (configured) BWPs ofthe serving cell.

A base station may not provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as defaultDownlinkBWP-Id. The wireless device may set theinitial active DL BWP as a default DL BWP. The wireless device may setthe initial active DL BWP as a default DL BWP, for example, based on notbeing provided by the higher layer parameter such asdefaultDownlinkBWP-Id. The default DL BWP may be the initial active DLBWP. The default DL BWP may be the initial active DL BWP, for example,based on not being provided by the higher layer parameter such asdefaultDownlinkBWP-Id.

A base station may provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as BWP-InactivityTimer. The higher layer parameter suchas BWP-InactivityTimer may indicate a BWP inactivity timer with a timervalue for a serving cell (e.g., primary cell, secondary cell). Thewireless device may decrement the BWP inactivity timer at the end of asubframe for frequency range 1 (e.g., FR1, sub-6 GHz) or at the end of ahalf subframe for frequency range 2 (e.g., FR2, millimeter-waves). Thewireless device may decrement the BWP inactivity timer at the end of asubframe for frequency range 1 (e.g., FR1, sub-6 GHz) or at the end of ahalf subframe for frequency range 2 (e.g., FR2, millimeter-waves), forexample, if provided with the higher layer such as parameterBWP-InactivityTimer and/or if the BWP inactivity timer is running. Thewireless device may decrement the BWP inactivity timer at the end of asubframe for frequency range 1 (e.g., FR1, sub-6 GHz) or at the end of ahalf subframe for frequency range 2 (e.g., FR2, millimeter-waves), forexample, based on not restarting the BWP inactivity timer for aninterval of the subframe for the frequency range 1 or an interval of thehalf subframe for the frequency range 2.

A wireless device may perform an active DL BWP change for a servingcell. A wireless device may perform an active DL BWP change for aserving cell, for example, based on an expiry of a BWP inactivity timerassociated with the serving cell. The wireless device may not berequired to receive or send (e.g., transmit) in the serving cell for atime duration from the beginning of a subframe for frequency range 1 orof half of a subframe for frequency range 2. The time duration maystart/be immediately. The time duration may start/be immediately (or aduration after), for example, based on expiry of the BWP inactivitytimer. The time duration may last until the beginning of a slot wherethe wireless device can receive and/or send (e.g., transmit).

A base station may provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id of a serving cell (e.g.,secondary cell). The higher layer parameter such asfirstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id may indicate a DL BWP on the serving cell(e.g., secondary cell). The wireless device may use the DL BWP as afirst active DL BWP on the serving cell. The wireless device may use theDL BWP as a first active DL BWP on the serving cell, for example, basedon being provided by the higher layer parameter such asfirstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id

A base station may provide a wireless device with a higher layerparameter such as firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL)of a serving cell (e.g., secondary cell). The higher layer parametersuch as firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id may indicate an UL BWP. The wirelessdevice may use the UL BWP as a first active UL BWP on the carrier of theserving cell. The wireless device may use the UL BWP as a first activeUL BWP on the carrier of the serving cell, for example, based on beingprovided by the higher layer parameter such as firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id.

A wireless device may not expect (determine not) to send (e.g.,transmit) a PUCCH with HARQ-ACK information on a PUCCH resourceindicated by a DCI format 1_0 or a DCI format 1_1. A wireless device maynot expect (determine not) to send (e.g., transmit) a PUCCH withHARQ-ACK information on a PUCCH resource indicated by a DCI format 1_0or a DCI format 11, for example, for paired spectrum operation. Awireless device may not expect (determine not) to send (e.g., transmit)a PUCCH with HARQ-ACK information on a PUCCH resource indicated by a DCIformat 1_0 or a DCI format 11, for example, if the wireless devicechanges its active UL BWP on a primary cell between a time of adetection of the DCI format 1_0 or the DCI format 1_1 and a time of acorresponding PUCCH transmission with the HARQ-ACK information. Awireless device may not monitor PDCCH. A wireless device may not monitorPDCCH, for example, if the wireless device performs RRM measurementsover a bandwidth that is not within the active DL BWP for the wirelessdevice.

A first BWP may be associated with a first CORESET and/or a secondCORESET. A wireless device may receive activation command(s) (e.g., aMAC CE) activating a first TCI state (or a first beam) for the firstCORESET and/or a second TCI state (or a second beam) for the secondCORESET. The wireless device may monitor the first CORESET. The wirelessdevice may monitor the first CORESET, for example, after receiving theactivation command(s). The wireless device may monitor the firstCORESET, for example, based on the first TCI state. The wireless devicemay monitor the second CORESET. The wireless device may monitor thesecond CORESET, for example, after receiving the activation command(s).The wireless device may monitor the second CORESET, for example, basedon the second TCI state. The wireless device may use the old TCI statesof the first BWP (e.g., the first TCI state and the second TCI state) tomonitor CORESET(s) of a second BWP. The wireless device may use the oldTCI states of the first BWP (e.g., the first TCI state and the secondTCI state) to monitor CORESET(s) of the second BWP, for example, if/whenthe wireless device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP. Thewireless device may use the old TCI states of the first BWP (e.g., thefirst TCI state and the second TCI state) to monitor CORESET(s) of thesecond BWP, for example, at least until the wireless device receivesactivation command(s) activating TCI states for the CORESET(s). Thesecond BWP may be associated with a third CORESET and/or a fourthCORESET. The wireless device may use the first TCI state of the firstCORESET and/or the second TCI state of the second CORESET in the firstBWP to monitor the third CORESET and/or the fourth CORESET in the secondBWP. The wireless device may use the first TCI state of the firstCORESET and the second TCI state of the second CORESET in the first BWPto monitor the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET in the second BWP,for example, at least until the wireless device receives activationcommand(s) activating a third TCI state for the third CORESET and afourth TCI state for the fourth CORESET.

At least some wireless devices may not be configured to map the old TCIstates of the first BWP (e.g., the first TCI state and the second TCIstate) to the CORESET(s) of the second BWP. For example, a wirelessdevice may not be configured to determine the TCI state of the old TCIstates that should be used to monitor the third CORESET and/or thefourth CORESET in the second BWP. The wireless device may not receiveDCI. The wireless device may not receive DCI, for example, if themapping between the old TCI states of the first BWP and the CORESET(s)in the second BWP is not specified/indicated. The wireless device maynot be configured to determine which TCI state of the first BWP (e.g.,the first TCI state or the second TCI state) will be used to monitor asingle CORESET in the second BWP. The wireless device may not beconfigured to determine which TCI state of the first BWP (e.g., thefirst TCI state or the second TCI state) will be used to monitor asingle CORESET in the second BWP, for example, if the second BWP has asingle CORESET (e.g., the third CORESET only). The wireless device maynot receive DCI in the single CORESET of the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may not receive DCI in the single CORESET of the second BWP, forexample, if the wireless device uses the first TCI state to monitor thesingle CORESET and the base station assumes the wireless device is usingthe second TCI state to monitor the single CORESET.

At least some wireless devices may not be configured to determinewhether to use the first TCI state of the first CORESET in the first BWPto monitor a third CORESET and/or a fourth CORESET in the second BWP.The wireless device may not be configured to determine whether to usethe first TCI state of the first CORESET in the first BWP to monitor athird CORESET and/or a fourth CORESET in the second BWP, for example, ifthe second BWP has a third CORESET and a fourth CORESET. The wirelessdevice may not be configured to determine whether to use the second TCIstate of the second CORESET in the first BWP to monitor the thirdCORESET and/or the fourth CORESET in the second BWP. The wireless devicemay not receive any downlink control information in the third CORESETand the fourth CORESET of the second BWP. The wireless device may notreceive any downlink control information in the third CORESET and thefourth CORESET of the second BWP, for example, if the wireless deviceuses the first TCI state to monitor the third CORESET and the second TCIstate to monitor the fourth CORESET, and if the base station assumes thewireless device is using the first TCI state to monitor the fourthCORESET and the wireless device is using the second TCI state to monitorthe third CORESET.

At least some wireless device may not be configured to determine how tomap the first TCI state and/or the second TCI state to a third CORESET,a fourth CORESET and/or a fifth CORESET. The wireless device may not beconfigured to determine how to map the first TCI state and/or the secondTCI state to a third CORESET, a fourth CORESET and/or a fifth CORESET,for example, if the second BWP has a third CORESET, a fourth CORESET anda fifth CORESET. The wireless device may not be configured to determinewhich of the CORESETs (e.g., third CORESET, fourth CORESET, fifthCORESET) in the second BWP should use the first TCI state and which ofthe CORESETs (e.g., third CORESET, fourth CORESET, fifth CORESET) in thesecond BWP should use the second TCI state. The wireless device may notreceive any downlink control information in the third CORESET, thefourth CORESET, and/or the fifth CORESET of the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may not receive any downlink control information in the thirdCORESET, the fourth CORESET, and/or the fifth CORESET of the second BWP,for example, if the wireless device is not be configured to determinethe TCI states that should be used in the CORESETs (e.g., third CORESET,fourth CORESET, fifth CORESET) of the second BWP.

As described herein, a wireless device may monitor CORESET(s) of asecond BWP. The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of the secondBWP, for example, if/when the wireless device switches from a first BWPto the second BWP. The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of thesecond BWP, for example, at least until the wireless device receivesactivation command(s) activating TCI state(s) for CORESET(s) in thesecond BWP. The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of the secondBWP, for example, based on a TCI state, among old TCI states (e.g., TCIstates used to monitor CORESETs in the first BWP), with a lowest (orhighest) TCI state index. The wireless device may receive DCI in theCORESET(s) of the second BWP, for example, based on monitoring theCORESET(s) of the second BWP based on a TCI state, among old TCI states(e.g., TCI states used to monitor CORESETs in the first BWP), with alowest (or highest) TCI state index.

The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of the second BWP, forexample, based on a TCI state of a CORESET, among CORESETs in the firstBWP, with the lowest CORESET index. The wireless device may receive DCIin the CORESET(s) of the second BWP, for example, based on monitoringthe CORESET(s) of the second BWP based a TCI state of a CORESET, amongCORESETs in the first BWP, with the lowest CORESET index. The wirelessdevice may not detect a beam failure, for example, based on receivingthe DCI in the CORESET(s) of the second BWP. The wireless device may notinitiate/perform a BFR procedure, for example, based on receiving theDCI in the CORESET(s) of the second BWP. The error rate (e.g., BLER) maybe reduced, for example, based on receiving the DCI in the CORESET(s) ofthe second BWP. The wireless device may not increase power consumption,for example, based on receiving the DCI in the CORESET(s) of the secondBWP. The latency/delay may be reduced, for example, based on receivingthe DCI in the CORESET(s) of the second BWP.

The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of a second BWP, forexample, based on a TCI state of a CORESET, among CORESETs in a firstBWP, in which the wireless device received the last (or most recent) DCIbefore switching from the first BWP to the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may receive DCI in the CORESET(s) of the second BWP, for example,based on monitoring the CORESET(s) of the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may monitor the CORESET(s) of the second BWP, for example, basedon a TCI state of a CORESET, among CORESETs in the first BWP, in whichthe wireless device received the last (or most recent) DCI beforeswitching from the first BWP to the second BWP.

The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of a second BWP, forexample, based on a TCI state of a CORESET, among CORESETs in a firstBWP, which is monitored last (or most recent) before switching to thesecond BWP. The wireless device may receive DCI in the CORESET(s) of thesecond BWP, for example, based on monitoring the CORESET(s) of thesecond BWP. The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of the secondBWP, for example, based on a TCI state of a CORESET, among CORESETs inthe first BWP, which may be monitored last (or most recent) beforeswitching to the second BWP.

The wireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of a second BWP, forexample, based on a mapping (e.g., cyclic mapping) between the CORESETsin a first BWP and CORESET(s) in the second BWP. The wireless device maydetermine the TCI states of the CORESET(s) in the second BWP. Thewireless device may determine the TCI states of the CORESET(s) in thesecond BWP, for example, based on mapping between the CORESETs in thefirst BWP and CORESET(s) in the second BWP. The first CORESET in thefirst BWP may mapped to the third CORESET in the second BWP in themapping. The second CORESET in the first BWP may be mapped to the fourthCORESET in the second BWP in the mapping. The first CORESET in the firstBWP may be mapped to the fifth CORESET in the second BWP in the mapping.The wireless device may receive DCI in the CORESET(s) of the second BWP,for example, based on monitoring the CORESET(s) of the second BWP. Thewireless device may monitor the CORESET(s) of the second BWP, forexample, based on a mapping (e.g., cyclic mapping) between the CORESETsin the first BWP and CORESET(s) in the second BWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a first PDSCH (e.g.,dynamically scheduled or period semi-persistent PDSCH). A base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) a second PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduledPDSCH, periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH). In at least some wirelesscommunications, a wireless device may not receive the first PDSCH andthe second PDSCH (e.g., both PDSCHs). A wireless device may not receivethe first PDSCH and the second PDSCH (e.g., both PDSCHs), for example,if a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled PDSCH) overlaps in timewith a second PDSCH (e.g., periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH). Thewireless device may only receive one of the overlapped PDSCHs (e.g.,dynamic PDSCH or the semi-persistent PDSCH associated with the lowestSPS index).

A base station may comprise multiple transmission and reception points(TRPs). TRPs may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device and/orreceive from a wireless device, one or more messages. The wirelessdevice may be capable of receiving overlapped PDSCHs simultaneously (orsubstantially simultaneously or during a same time period), for example,if the wireless is configured to use multiple TRPs. The wireless devicemay be capable of receiving both overlapped PDSCHs simultaneously (orsubstantially simultaneously or during a same time period), for example,if a wireless device is capable of supporting multiple TRPs(multi-TRPs). At least some wireless devices that may drop at least oneof the overlapped PDSCHs may not be efficient for reception of one ormore PDSCHs. Dropping at least one of the overlapped PDSCHs may not beefficient for reception of one or more PDSCHs, for example, if thewireless device supports multi-TRPs.

As described herein, a wireless device may receive a first PDSCH (e.g.,dynamically scheduled, or periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH)transmission and a second PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled, orperiodic or semi-persistent PDSCH) transmission. The wireless device mayreceive a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled PDSCH) transmissionassociated with a first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) and a secondPDSCH (e.g., periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH) transmission associatedwith a second CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-2). The wireless device mayreceive a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled PDSCH) transmissionassociated with a first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) and a secondPDSCH (e.g., periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH) transmission associatedwith a second CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-2), for example, if thefirst PDSCH transmission associated with the first CORESET group index(e.g., TRP-1) overlaps in time with the second PDSCH transmissionassociated with the second CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-2). Thewireless device may receive a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduledPDSCH) transmission associated with a first CORESET group index (e.g.,TRP-1) and a second PDSCH (e.g., periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH)transmission associated with a second CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-2),for example, if the first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) and thesecond CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-2) are different. The wirelessdevice may receive the overlapped PDSCH transmissions (e.g., the firstPDSCH transmission and the second PDSCH transmission), for example,based on a difference between the CORESET group indexes of theoverlapped PDSCH transmissions. The QoS requirements (e.g., in terms ofdelay, data rate, error rate, and/or any other quality/servicerequirement) may improve, for example, based on receiving the overlappedPDSCH transmissions. The wireless device may not increase powerconsumption, for example, for example, based on receiving the overlappedPDSCH transmissions.

The wireless device may receive a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamicallyscheduled, or periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH) transmission and mayskip receiving a second PDSCH (e.g., periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH)transmission. The wireless device may receive a first PDSCH (e.g.,dynamically scheduled, or periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH)transmission associated with a first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1)and may skip receiving a second PDSCH (e.g., periodic or semi-persistentPDSCH) transmission associated with a second CORESET group index (e.g.,TRP-1). The wireless device may receive only a first PDSCH transmissionassociated with a first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) and may skipreceiving a second PDSCH transmission associated with a second CORESETgroup index (e.g., TRP-1), for example, if the first PDSCH transmissionassociated with the first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) overlaps intime with the second PDSCH transmission associated with the secondCORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1). The wireless device may receive onlya first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled, or periodic orsemi-persistent PDSCH) transmission associated with a first CORESETgroup index (e.g., TRP-1) and may skip receiving a second PDSCH (e.g.,periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH) transmission associated with a secondCORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1), for example, if the CORESET groupindexes of the first PDSCH transmission and the second PDSCHtransmission are the same. The wireless device may receive only oneoverlapped PDSCH transmission (e.g., the first PDSCH transmission) andskip receiving the other overlapped PDSCH transmission (e.g., the secondPDSCH transmission), for example, if the CORESET group indexes of theoverlapped PDSCH transmissions (e.g., the first PDSCH transmission andthe second PDSCH transmission) are the same.

The wireless device may skip receiving a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamicallyscheduled, or periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH) transmission and mayreceive a second PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled, or periodic orsemi-persistent PDSCH) transmission. The wireless device may skipreceiving a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled, or periodic orsemi-persistent PDSCH) transmission associated with a first CORESETgroup index (e.g., TRP-1) and may receive a second PDSCH (e.g.,dynamically scheduled, or periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH)transmission associated with a second CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1).The wireless device may skip receiving a first PDSCH transmissionassociated with a first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) and mayreceive a second PDSCH transmission associated with a second CORESETgroup index (e.g., TRP-1), for example, if the first PDSCH transmissionassociated with the first CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1) overlaps intime with the second PDSCH transmission associated with the secondCORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1). The wireless device may skipreceiving a first PDSCH (e.g., dynamically scheduled, or periodic orsemi-persistent PDSCH) transmission associated with a first CORESETgroup index (e.g., TRP-1) and may receive a second PDSCH (e.g.,dynamically scheduled, or periodic or semi-persistent PDSCH)transmission associated with a second CORESET group index (e.g., TRP-1),for example, if the CORESET group indexes of the first PDSCHtransmission and the second PDSCH transmission are the same. Thewireless device may receive only one overlapped PDSCH transmission(e.g., the second PDSCH transmission) and skip receiving the otheroverlapped PDSCH transmission (e.g., the first PDSCH transmission), forexample, if the CORESET group indexes of the overlapped PDSCHtransmissions (e.g., the first PDSCH transmission and the second PDSCHtransmission) are the same.

FIG. 17 shows an example of beam management. A wireless device mayreceive one or more first activation commands, for example, activating,for the one or more first CORESETs of the first BWP, a plurality ofactivated TCI states among a first plurality of TCI states. The wirelessdevice may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may monitor, for the DCI, the PDCCH in/via the one or more secondCORESETs of the second BWP based on an activated TCI state. The wirelessdevice may determine/select the activated TCI state among the pluralityof activated TCI states. The wireless device may monitor, for the DCI,the PDCCH in/via the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP basedon the activated TCI state, for example, until receiving one or moresecond activation commands activating, for the one or more secondCORESETs, one or more activated TCI states among a plurality of TCIstates.

FIG. 18 shows an example of beam management. A wireless device mayreceive one or more first activation commands, for example, activating,for the one or more first CORESETs of the first BWP, a plurality ofactivated TCI states among a first plurality of TCI states. The wirelessdevice may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may monitor, for the DCI, the PDCCH in/via the one or more secondCORESETs of the second BWP based on an activated TCI state. The wirelessdevice may determine/select the activated TCI state with a lowest (orhighest) TCI state index among the plurality of TCI state indexes of theplurality of activated TCI states. The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET with a lowest (orhighest) CORESET index among the CORESET indexes of the one or morefirst CORESETs. The wireless device may monitor, for the DCI, the PDCCHin/via the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP based on theactivated TCI state, for example, until receiving one or more secondactivation commands activating, for the one or more second CORESETs, oneor more activated TCI states among a plurality of TCI states.

FIG. 19 shows an example of beam management. A wireless device mayreceive one or more first activation commands, for example, activating,for the one or more first CORESETs of the first BWP, a plurality ofactivated TCI states among a first plurality of TCI states. The wirelessdevice may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP. The wirelessdevice may monitor, for the DCI, the PDCCH in/via the one or more secondCORESETs of the second BWP based on an activated TCI state. The wirelessdevice may determine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET (orassociated or linked to) with a search space set that is monitored last(or latest or most recent). The search space set that is monitored last(or latest or most recent) may comprise the search space set that ismonitored last (or latest or most recent), for example, based onswitching from the first BWP to the second BWP. The wireless device maymonitor, for the DCI, the PDCCH in/via the one or more second CORESETsof the second BWP based on the activated TCI state, for example, untilreceiving one or more second activation commands activating, for the oneor more second CORESETs, one or more activated TCI states among aplurality of TCI states.

FIG. 17 , FIG. 18 , and FIG. 19 show examples of beam management. Awireless device may receive one or more messages. The wireless devicemay receive the one or more messages, for example, from a base station.The one or more messages may comprise one or more configurationparameters for a cell. The cell may comprise a plurality of BWPscomprising a first BWP (e.g., 1st BWP in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) and asecond BWP (e.g., 2nd BWP in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ). The first BWP may bea first downlink BWP. The second BWP may be a second downlink BWP. Thefirst BWP may be a first uplink BWP. The second BWP may be a seconduplink BWP.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a first pluralityof TCI states for one or more first CORESETs of the first BWP. The oneor more configuration parameters may indicate the one or more firstCORESETs for the first BWP of the cell. The first BWP may comprise theone or more first CORESETs.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate one or more TCIstates for one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP. The one ormore configuration parameters may indicate the one or more secondCORESETs for the second BWP of the cell. The second BWP may comprise theone or more second CORESETs. The first plurality of TCI states mayprovide QCL relationships between downlink reference signals in a TCIstate of the first plurality of TCI states and PDCCH DM-RS ports in thefirst BWP. The one or more TCI states may provide QCL relationshipsbetween downlink reference signals in a TCI state of the one or more TCIstates and PDCCH DM-RS ports in the second BWP.

A TCI state may indicate/comprise one or more QCL-Info. Each QCL-Info ofthe one or more QCL-Info may comprise/indicate a respective referencesignal (e.g., referenceSignal, SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) and/or arespective QCL type (e.g., QCL-Type). A QCL-Info of the one or moreQCL-Info may comprise/indicate a reference signal. A QCL-Info of the oneor more QCL-Info may comprise/indicate a QCL-Type. The QCL-Type may beTypeA, TypeB, TypeC, or TypeD.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate TCI state indexes(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StateID) for the firstplurality of TCI states. Each TCI state of the first plurality of TCIstates may be identified/indicated by a respective TCI state index ofthe TCI state indexes. A first TCI state of the first plurality of TCIstates may be identified/indicated by a first TCI state index of the TCIstate indexes. A second TCI state of the first plurality of TCI statesmay be identified/indicated by a second TCI state index of the TCI stateindexes.

The one or more first CORESETs may comprise a first CORESET (e.g.,CORESET 1 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ). The one or more first CORESETs maycomprise a second CORESET (e.g., CORESET 2 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ). Thefirst plurality of TCI states may comprise one or more first TCI statesfor the first CORESET. The first plurality of TCI states may compriseone or more second TCI states for the second CORESET.

The one or more second CORESETs may comprise a third CORESET (e.g.,CORESET 3 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ). The one or more second CORESETs maycomprise a fourth CORESET (e.g., CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ). Theone or more TCI states may comprise one or more third TCI states for thethird CORESET. The one or more TCI states may comprise one or morefourth TCI states for the fourth CORESET.

The wireless device may activate the first BWP. The activating the firstBWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the first BWP as a firstactive BWP of the cell. The activating the first BWP may comprise thatthe wireless device sets the first BWP in an active state. Theactivating the first BWP may comprise switching the first BWP from aninactive state to an active state.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate CORESET indexes(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter such asControlResourceSetId) for the one or more first CORESETs. Each CORESETof the one or more first CORESETs may be identified/indicated by arespective CORESET index of the CORESET indexes. The first CORESET maybe identified/indicated by a first CORESET index of the CORESET indexes.The second CORESET may be identified/indicated by a second CORESET indexof the CORESET indexes.

The wireless device may receive one or more first activation commands(e.g., TCI State Indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE,first activation commands at time TO in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 ). The wirelessdevice may receive one or more first activation commands (e.g., TCIState Indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE, firstactivation commands at time T0 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 ), for example,activating, for the one or more first CORESETs of the first BWP, aplurality of activated TCI states among the first plurality of TCIstates. Each activation command of the one or more first activationcommands may activate a TCI state for a respective CORESET of the one ormore first CORESETs. Each activation command of the one or more firstactivation commands may activate a TCI state, among the plurality ofactivated TCI states, for a respective CORESET of the one or more firstCORESETs. The wireless device may activate/use each TCI state of theplurality of activated TCI states for a respective CORESET of the one ormore first CORESETs. The wireless device may activate/use each TCI stateof the plurality of activated TCI states for a (single, only one)CORESET of the one or more first CORESETs. The plurality of activatedTCI states may be applicable for PDCCH reception (in the one or morefirst CORESETs) in the first BWP of the cell.

The wireless device may receive a first activation command (e.g., TCIState Indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE). Thewireless device may receive a first activation command (e.g., TCI StateIndication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, attime T0 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 . The wireless device may receive a firstactivation command (e.g., TCI State Indication for wirelessdevice-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, activating a first TCI state(e.g., TCI state 1 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the one or more first TCIstates of the first CORESET. The first activation command may have afield indicating/comprising a first TCI state index (e.g., provided by ahigher layer parameter tci-StateID) of the first TCI state. The wirelessdevice may activate the first TCI state for the first CORESET. Thewireless device may activate the first TCI state for the first CORESET,for example, based on the field indicating the first TCI state,

The wireless device may receive a second activation command (e.g., TCIState Indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE). Thewireless device may receive a second activation command (e.g., TCI StateIndication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, attime T0 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 . The wireless device may receive a secondactivation command (e.g., TCI State Indication for wirelessdevice-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, activating a second TCIstate (e.g., TCI state 2 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the one or moresecond TCI states of the second CORESET. The second activation commandmay have a field indicating/comprising a second TCI state index (e.g.,provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StateID) of the second TCIstate. The wireless device may activate the second TCI state for thesecond CORESET. The wireless device may activate the second TCI statefor the second CORESET, for example, based on the field indicating thesecond TCI state. The plurality of activated TCI states may comprise thefirst TCI state for the first CORESET and the second TCI state for thesecond CORESET.

The first TCI state may be associated with and/or applicable to areception of PDCCH in the first CORESET of the first BWP. The first TCIstate being associated with and/or applicable to the reception of PDCCHin the first CORESET of the first BWP may comprise that (the wirelessdevice determines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCLedwith a first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 indicated by TCI state 1 inFIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) indicated by the first TCI state with respect to afirst QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD) indicated by the first TCI state. Thefirst TCI state being associated with and/or applicable to the receptionof PDCCH in the first CORESET of the first BWP may comprise that thewireless device receives the PDCCH with DCI in/via the first CORESET ofthe first BWP. The first TCI state being associated with and/orapplicable to the reception of PDCCH in the first CORESET of the firstBWP may comprise that the wireless device receives the PDCCH with DCIin/via the first CORESET of the first BWP, for example, based on thefirst TCI state. The receiving the PDCCH in/via the first CORESET basedon the first TCI state may comprise that (the wireless device determinesthat) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCLed with the firstreference signal (indicated by the first TCI state) with respect to thefirst QCL type (indicated by the first TCI state).

The second TCI state may be associated with and/or applicable to areception of PDCCH in the second CORESET of the first BWP. The secondTCI state being associated with and/or applicable to the reception ofPDCCH in the second CORESET of the first BWP may comprise that (thewireless device determines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH isQCLed with a second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 indicated by TCI state2 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) indicated by the second TCI state withrespect to a second QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD) indicated by the secondTCI state. The second TCI state being associated with and/or applicableto the reception of PDCCH in the second CORESET of the first BWP maycomprise that the wireless device receives the PDCCH with DCI in/via thesecond CORESET of the first BWP. The second TCI state being associatedwith and/or applicable to the reception of PDCCH in the second CORESETof the first BWP may comprise that the wireless device receives thePDCCH with DCI in/via the second CORESET of the first BWP, for example,based on the second TCI state. The receiving the PDCCH in/via the secondCORESET based on the second TCI state may comprise that (the wirelessdevice determines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCLedwith the second reference signal (indicated by the second TCI state)with respect to the second QCL type (indicated by the second TCI state).

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of TCIstate indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StateID).The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a plurality of TCIstate indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StateID),for example, for the plurality of activated TCI states. Each TCI stateof the plurality of activated TCI states may be identified/indicated bya respective TCI state index of the plurality of TCI state indexes. Afirst TCI state of the plurality of activated TCI states may beidentified/indicated by a first TCI state index of the plurality of TCIstate indexes. A second TCI state of the plurality of activated TCIstates may be identified/indicated by a second TCI state index of theplurality of TCI state indexes. The TCI state indexes of the firstplurality of TCI states may comprise the plurality of TCI state indexesof the plurality of activated TCI states.

The wireless device may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP ofthe cell (e.g., at time T1 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 ). The switching from thefirst BWP to the second BWP may comprise activating the second BWP as asecond active BWP of the cell. The activating the second BWP maycomprise that the wireless device sets the second BWP in an activestate. The switching from the first BWP to the second BWP may comprisedeactivating the first BWP. The deactivating the first BWP may comprisethat the wireless device sets the first BWP in an inactive state. Thewireless device may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP. Thewireless device may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP, forexample, based on expiry of a BWP inactivity timer. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the BWP inactivity timer for thecell. The second BWP may be a default BWP (e.g., default downlink BWP)of the cell. The wireless device may switch from the first BWP to thesecond BWP, for example, based on receiving a downlink signal (e.g.,DCI, RRC, MAC CE) indicating the second BWP. A field in the downlinksignal may indicate the second BWP (e.g., or comprise a BWP indexidentifying/indicating the second BWP). The wireless device may switchfrom the first BWP to the second BWP, for example, based on initiating arandom access procedure. The random access procedure may be initiatedfor the cell.

The wireless device may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP. Thewireless device may switch from the first BWP to the second BWP, forexample, for a BWP switching delay (e.g., BWP switching delay/gap inFIG. 17 -FIG. 19 ). The wireless device may initiate the switching fromthe first BWP to the second BWP at a first time (e.g., time T1 in FIG.17 -FIG. 19 ). The wireless device may complete the switching from thefirst BWP to the second BWP at a second time (e.g., time T2 in FIG. 17-FIG. 19 ). The BWP switching delay may be the difference between thesecond time and the first time (e.g., T2−T1 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 ). Thewireless device may determine/select an activated TCI state among theplurality of activated TCI states. The wireless device maydetermine/select an activated TCI state among the plurality of activatedTCI states, for example, based on switching from the first BWP to thesecond BWP. The wireless device may determine/select an activated TCIstate among the plurality of activated TCI states, for example, for theone or more second CORESETs of the second BWP.

The activated TCI state may be associated with and/or applicable for areception of PDCCH. The activated TCI state may be associated withand/or applicable for a reception of PDCCH, for example, in the one ormore second CORESETs of the second BWP of the cell. The activated TCIstate may be associated with and/or applicable for a reception of PDCCH,for example, in each CORESET of the one or more second CORESETs in thesecond BWP.

The activated TCI state may comprise/indicate a reference signal. Thereference signal comprise a downlink reference signal (e.g., SSB,CSI-RS, DM-RS). The reference signal may comprise an uplink referencesignal (e.g., SRS, DM-RS). The activated TCI state may comprise/indicatea QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeD, etc.). The QCL type may compriseQCL-TypeD. The activated TCI state may indicate the QCL type for thereference signal.

The wireless device may monitor PDCCH in/via the one or more secondCORESETs (e.g., CORESET 3, CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of thesecond BWP. The wireless device may monitor PDCCH in/via the one or moresecond CORESETs (e.g., CORESET 3, CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) ofthe second BWP, for example, for DCI. The wireless device may monitorPDCCH in/via the one or more second CORESETs (e.g., CORESET 3, CORESET 4in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the second BWP for DCI, for example, basedon the activated TCI state. The monitoring the PDCCH in/via the one ormore second CORESETs of the second BWP for the DCI based on theactivated TCI state may comprise monitoring, for the DCI, the PDCCHin/via each CORESET of the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWPbased on the activated TCI state.

The wireless device may receive the PDCCH with the DCI. The wirelessdevice may receive the PDCCH with the DCI, for example, via the one ormore second CORESETs. The wireless device may receive the PDCCH with theDCI. The wireless device may receive the PDCCH with the DCI, forexample, based on the activated TCI state. The wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH with the DCI, for example, if monitoring, for the DCI,the PDCCH. The receiving, via the one or more second CORESETs, the PDCCHwith the DCI based on the activated TCI state may comprise receiving,via each CORESET of the one or more second CORESETs, the PDCCH with theDCI based on the activated TCI state.

The activated TCI state may be associated with and/or applicable to areception of PDCCH with DCI. The activated TCI state may be associatedwith and/or applicable to a reception of PDCCH with DCI, for example, ina CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3, CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of theone or more second CORESETs of the second BWP. The monitoring, for theDCI, the PDCCH in/via a CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3, CORESET 4 in FIG. 18and FIG. 19 ) of the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP basedon the activated TCI state may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH with the DCIreceived in the CORESET is QCLed with the reference signal indicated bythe activated TCI state with respect to the QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD)indicated by the activated TCI state.

The wireless device may receive, via a CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3, CORESET4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the one or more second CORESETs, the PDCCHwith the DCI, for example, based on the activated TCI state. Thewireless device may determine that at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCHwith the DCI is QCLed with the reference signal (indicated by theactivated TCI state) with respect to the QCL type (indicated by theactivated TCI state). The receiving, via a CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3,CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the one or more second CORESETs,the PDCCH with the DCI based on the activated TCI state may comprisethat (the wireless device determines that) at least one DM-RS port ofthe PDCCH with the DCI is QCLed with the reference signal (indicated bythe activated TCI state) with respect to the QCL type (indicated by theactivated TCI state). The wireless device may monitor, for the DCI, thePDCCH in/via the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP based onthe activated TCI state. The wireless device may monitor, for the DCI,the PDCCH in/via the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP basedon the activated TCI state, for example, until receiving one or moresecond activation commands (e.g., TCI State Indication for wirelessdevice-specific PDCCH MAC CE, Second activation commands at time T3 inFIG. 17 -FIG. 19 ) activating, for the one or more second CORESETs, oneor more activated TCI states among the one or more TCI states.

An activation command (e.g., each activation command) of the one or moresecond activation commands may activate a TCI state for a respectiveCORESET of the one or more second CORESETs. An activation command (e.g.,each activation command) of the one or more second activation commandsmay activate a TCI state, among the one or more activated TCI states,for a respective CORESET of the one or more second CORESETs. Thewireless device may activate/use each TCI state of the one or moreactivated TCI states for a respective CORESET of the one or more secondCORESETs. The wireless device may activate/use each TCI state of the oneor more activated TCI states for a (single, only one) CORESET of the oneor more second CORESETs. The one or more activated TCI states may beassociated with and/or applicable for PDCCH reception in the one or moresecond CORESETs of the second BWP of the cell.

The wireless device may receive a third activation command (e.g., TCIState Indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE). Thewireless device may receive a third activation command (e.g., TCI StateIndication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, attime T3 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 . The wireless device may receive a thirdactivation command (e.g., TCI State Indication for wirelessdevice-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, activating a third TCI state(e.g., TCI state 3 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the one or more third TCIstates of the third CORESET. The third activation command may have afield indicating/comprising a third TCI state index (e.g., provided by ahigher layer parameter tci-StateID) of the third TCI state. The wirelessdevice may activate the third TCI state for the third CORESET. Thewireless device may activate the third TCI state for the third CORESET,for example, based on the field indicating the third TCI state.

The wireless device may receive a fourth activation command (e.g., TCIState Indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE). Thewireless device may receive a fourth activation command (e.g., TCI StateIndication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, attime T0 in FIG. 17 -FIG. 19 . The wireless device may receive a fourthactivation command (e.g., TCI State Indication for wirelessdevice-specific PDCCH MAC CE), for example, activating a fourth TCIstate (e.g., TCI state 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) of the one or morefourth TCI states of the fourth CORESET. The fourth activation commandmay have a field indicating/comprising a fourth TCI state index (e.g.,provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StateID) of the fourth TCIstate. The wireless device may activate the fourth TCI state for thefourth CORESET. The wireless device may activate the fourth TCI statefor the fourth CORESET, for example, based on the field indicating thefourth TCI state. The one or more activated TCI states may comprise thethird TCI state for the third CORESET and the fourth TCI state for thefourth CORESET.

The third TCI state may be associated with and/or applicable to areception of PDCCH in the third CORESET of the second BWP. The third TCIstate being associated with and/or applicable to the reception of PDCCHin the third CORESET of the second BWP may comprise that (the wirelessdevice determines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCLedwith a third reference signal (e.g., RS 3 indicated by TCI state 3 inFIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) indicated by the third TCI state with respect to athird QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD) indicated by the third TCI state. Thethird TCI state being associated with and/or applicable to the receptionof PDCCH in the third CORESET of the second BWP may comprise that thewireless device receives the PDCCH with DCI in/via the third CORESET ofthe second BWP. The third TCI state being associated with and/orapplicable to the reception of PDCCH in the third CORESET of the secondBWP may comprise that the wireless device receives the PDCCH with DCIin/via the third CORESET of the second BWP, for example, based on thethird TCI state. The receiving the PDCCH in/via the third CORESET basedon the third TCI state may comprise that (the wireless device determinesthat) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCLed with the thirdreference signal (indicated by the third TCI state) with respect to thethird QCL type (indicated by the third TCI state).

The fourth TCI state may be associated with and/or applicable to areception of PDCCH in the fourth CORESET of the second BWP. The fourthTCI state being associated with and/or applicable to the reception ofPDCCH in the fourth CORESET of the second BWP may comprise that (thewireless device determines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH isQCLed with a fourth reference signal (e.g., RS 4 indicated by TCI state4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ) indicated by the fourth TCI state withrespect to a fourth QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD) indicated by the fourthTCI state. The fourth TCI state being associated with and/or applicableto the reception of PDCCH in the fourth CORESET of the second BWP maycomprise that the wireless device receives the PDCCH with DCI in/via thefourth CORESET of the second BWP based on the fourth TCI state. Thereceiving the PDCCH in/via the fourth CORESET based on the fourth TCIstate may comprise that (the wireless device determines that) at leastone DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCLed with the fourth reference signal(indicated by the fourth TCI state) with respect to the fourth QCL type(indicated by the fourth TCI state).

The selecting the activated TCI state may be based on a rule (e.g., apredefined rule) between the wireless device and the base station. Thedetermining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on the TCI state indexes (e.g.,provided by a higher layer parameter tci-StateID). Thedetermining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on the plurality of TCI state indexesof the plurality of activated TCI states.

The wireless device may determine/select the activated TCI state with alowest (or highest) TCI state index among the plurality of TCI stateindexes of the plurality of activated TCI states. The plurality ofactivated TCI states may comprise a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 1in FIG. 18 ) identified/indicated by a first TCI state index and asecond TCI state (e.g., TCI state 2 in FIG. 18 ) identified by a secondTCI state index. The determining/selecting the activated TCI state amongthe first TCI state and the second TCI state may be based on the firstTCI state index and the second TCI state index. The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state with a lowest (or highest) TCIstate index among the first TCI state index and the second TCI stateindex.

The first TCI state index may be lower than the second TCI state index.The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the firstTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being lower than the second TCI state index. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the secondTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being lower than the second TCI state index.

The first TCI state index may be higher than the second TCI state index.The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the firstTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being higher than the second TCI state index. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the secondTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being higher than the second TCI state index.

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on the CORESET indexes (e.g., providedby a higher layer parameter ControlResourceSetId) for the one or morefirst CORESETs. The wireless device may determine/select the activatedTCI state of a CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESET index amongthe CORESET indexes of the one or more first CORESETs. The plurality ofactivated TCI states for the one or more first CORESETs may comprise afirst TCI state (e.g., TCI state 1 in FIG. 18 ) of a first CORESET(e.g., CORESET 1 in FIG. 18 ) identified/indicated by a first CORESETindex and a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 2 in FIG. 18 ) of a secondCORESET (e.g., CORESET 2 in FIG. 18 ) identified/indicated by a secondCORESET index. The determining/selecting the activated TCI state amongthe first TCI state and the second TCI state may be based on the firstCORESET index and the second CORESET index. The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET with a lowest (orhighest) CORESET index. The wireless device may determine/select theactivated TCI state of a CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESETindex, for example, among the first CORESET index of the first CORESETand the second CORESET index of the second CORESET.

The first CORESET index may be lower than the second CORESET index. Thewireless device may determine/select the first TCI state of the firstCORESET as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the first TCI state of the first CORESET as theactivated TCI state, for example, based on the first CORESET index beinglower than the second CORESET index. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state of the second CORESET as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the secondTCI state of the second CORESET as the activated TCI state, for example,based on the first CORESET index being lower than the second CORESETindex.

The first CORESET index may be higher than the second CORESET index. Thewireless device may determine/select the first TCI state of the firstCORESET as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the first TCI state of the first CORESET as theactivated TCI state, for example, based on the first CORESET index beinghigher than the second CORESET index. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state of the second CORESET as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the secondTCI state of the second CORESET as the activated TCI state, for example,based on the first CORESET index being higher than the second CORESETindex.

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on reception times of one or morefirst activation commands for the one or more first CORESETs. Thewireless device may determine/select the activated TCI state of aCORESET with an activation command that is received last (or latest ormost recent) among the one or more first activation commands of the oneor more first CORESETs. The activation command that is received last (orlatest or most recent) may comprise the activation command that isreceived last (or latest or more recent). The activation command that isreceived last (or latest or most recent) may comprise the activationcommand that is received last (or latest or more recent), for example,based on switching from the first BWP to the second BWP (e.g., beforetime T1 in FIG. 19 ).

The one or more first activation commands for the one or more firstCORESETs may comprise a first activation command. The one or more firstactivation commands for the one or more first CORESETs may comprise afirst activation command, for example, for a first CORESET (e.g.,CORESET 1 in FIG. 19 ). The one or more first activation commands forthe one or more first CORESETs may comprise a first activation command,for example, activating a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 1 in FIG. 19). The one or more first activation commands for the one or more firstCORESETs may comprise a second activation command. The one or more firstactivation commands for the one or more first CORESETs may comprise asecond activation command, for example, for a second CORESET (e.g.,CORESET 2 in FIG. 19 ). The one or more first activation commands forthe one or more first CORESETs may comprise a second activation command,for example, activating a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 2 in FIG. 19). The wireless device may receive the first activation command at afirst reception time (e.g., at time T0 a in FIG. 19 ). The wirelessdevice may receive the second activation command at a second receptiontime (e.g., at time T0 b in FIG. 19 ).

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the first TCIstate and the second TCI state may be based on the first reception timeand the second reception time. The wireless device may determine/selectthe activated TCI state of a CORESET with a latest (or more recent orlast) activation command reception time. The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET with a latest (ormore recent or last) activation command reception time, for example,among the first reception time of the first activation command for thefirst CORESET and the second reception time of the second activationcommand for the second CORESET.

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on reception times of DCI via the oneor more first CORESETs. The wireless device may determine/select theactivated TCI state of a CORESET. The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET, for example,among the one or more first CORESETs. The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET, for example, thatthe wireless device receives DCI last (or latest or most recent). Thewireless device may receive the DCI, for example, based on switchingfrom the first BWP to the second BWP (e.g., before time T1 in FIG. 19 ).The DCI may schedule a transport block (e.g., PDSCH, PUSCH). The DCI maybe the last DCI received in the first BWP. The DCI may be the last DCIreceived in the first BWP, for example, based on switching from thefirst BWP to the second BWP (e.g., before time T1 in FIG. 19 ).

The wireless device may receive a first DCI. The wireless device mayreceive a first DCI, for example, via a first CORESET (e.g., CORESET 1in FIG. 19 ) of the one or more first CORESETs. The first DCI mayschedule a first transport block (e.g., PDSCH, PUSCH). The wirelessdevice may receive the first DCI, for example, based on a first TCIstate (e.g., TCI state 1 in FIG. 19 ). The wireless device may receivethe first DCI, for example, at a first reception time (e.g., at time T0a in FIG. 19 ).

The wireless device may receive a second DCI. The wireless device mayreceive a second DCI, for example, via a second CORESET (e.g., CORESET 2in FIG. 19 ) of the one or more first CORESETs. The second DCI mayschedule a second transport block (e.g., PDSCH, PUSCH). The wirelessdevice may receive the second DCI, for example, based on a second TCIstate (e.g., TCI state 2 in FIG. 19 ). The wireless device may receivethe second DCI, for example, at a second reception time (e.g., at timeT0 b in FIG. 19 ).

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on monitoring times of search spacesets for (or associated with) the one or more first CORESETs. Thewireless device may determine/select the activated TCI state of aCORESET (or associated or linked to) with a search space set that ismonitored last (or latest or most recent). The wireless device maydetermine/select the activated TCI state of a CORESET (or associated orlinked to) with a search space set that is monitored last (or latest ormost recent), for example, among monitoring times of search space setsof (or associated with or linked to) the one or more first CORESETs. Thesearch space set that is monitored last (or latest or most recent) maycomprise the search space set that is monitored last (or latest or mostrecent), for example, based on switching from the first BWP to thesecond BWP (e.g., before time T1 in FIG. 19 ).

The monitoring times for the search space sets for the one or more firstCORESETs may comprise a first reception time (e.g., at time T0 a in FIG.19 ). The monitoring times for the search space sets for the one or morefirst CORESETs may comprise a first reception time (e.g., at time T0 ain FIG. 19 ), for example, for a first search space set associated witha first CORESET (e.g., CORESET 1 in FIG. 19 ) of the one or more firstCORESETs. The wireless device may monitor the first search space set.The wireless device may monitor the first search space set, for example,based on a first TCI state (e.g., TCI state 1 in FIG. 19 ) of theplurality of activated TCI states.

The monitoring times for the search space sets for the one or more firstCORESETs may comprise a second reception time (e.g., at time T0 b inFIG. 19 ). The monitoring times for the search space sets for the one ormore first CORESETs may comprise a second reception time (e.g., at timeT0 b in FIG. 19 ), for example, for a second search space set associatedwith a second CORESET (e.g., CORESET 2 in FIG. 19 ) of the one or morefirst CORESETs. The wireless device may monitor the second search spaceset. The wireless device may monitor the second search space set, forexample, based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI state 2 in FIG. 19 ) ofthe plurality of activated TCI states.

The first reception time may be later (or more recent) than the secondreception time. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCIstate of the first CORESET as the activated TCI state. The wirelessdevice may determine/select the first TCI state of the first CORESET asthe activated TCI state, for example, based on the first reception timebeing later (or more recent) than the second reception time. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state of the secondCORESET as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state of the second CORESET as theactivated TCI state, for example, based on the first reception timebeing later (or more recent) than the second reception time.

The first reception time may be earlier (or less recent) than the secondreception time. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCIstate of the first CORESET as the activated TCI state. The wirelessdevice may determine/select the first TCI state of the first CORESET asthe activated TCI state, for example, based on the first reception timebeing earlier (or less recent) than the second reception time. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state of the secondCORESET as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state of the second CORESET as theactivated TCI state, for example, based on the first reception timebeing earlier (or less recent) than the second reception time.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a second pluralityof TCI states for PDSCH reception in the first BWP. The second pluralityof TCI states may comprise the first plurality of TCI states. The firstplurality of TCI states may be a subset of the second plurality of TCIstates. The wireless device may receive one or more activation commands(e.g., TCI State Indication for wireless device-specific PDSCH MAC CE).The wireless device may receive one or more activation commands (e.g.,TCI State Indication for wireless device-specific PDSCH MAC CE), forexample, activating, for the first BWP, a second plurality of activatedTCI states among the second plurality of TCI states.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a second pluralityof TCI state indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametertci-StateID). The one or more configuration parameters may indicate asecond plurality of TCI state indexes (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter tci-StateID), for example, for the second plurality ofactivated TCI states. Each TCI state of the second plurality ofactivated TCI states may be identified by a respective TCI state indexof the second plurality of TCI state indexes. A first TCI state of thesecond plurality of activated TCI states may be identified by a firstTCI state index of the second plurality of TCI state indexes. A secondTCI state of the second plurality of activated TCI states may beidentified by a second TCI state index of the second plurality of TCIstate indexes. The wireless device may determine/select an activated TCIstate among the second plurality of activated TCI states. The wirelessdevice may determine/select an activated TCI state among the secondplurality of activated TCI states, for example, based on switching fromthe first BWP to the second BWP. The wireless device maydetermine/select an activated TCI state among the second plurality ofactivated TCI states, for example, for the one or more second CORESETsof the second BWP.

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the secondplurality of activated TCI states may be based on the second pluralityof TCI state indexes of the second plurality of activated TCI states.The wireless device may determine/select the activated TCI state with alowest (or highest) TCI state index among the second plurality of TCIstate indexes of the second plurality of activated TCI states. Thesecond plurality of activated TCI states may comprise a first TCI stateidentified/indicated by a first TCI state index and a second TCI stateidentified by a second TCI state index. The determining/selecting theactivated TCI state among the first TCI state and the second TCI statemay be based on the first TCI state index and the second TCI stateindex. The wireless device may determine/select the activated TCI statewith a lowest (or highest) TCI state index among the first TCI stateindex and the second TCI state index.

The first TCI state index may be lower than the second TCI state index.The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the firstTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being lower than the second TCI state index. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the secondTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being lower than the second TCI state index.

The first TCI state index may be higher than the second TCI state index.The wireless device may determine/select the first TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the firstTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being higher than the second TCI state index. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state as theactivated TCI state. The wireless device may determine/select the secondTCI state as the activated TCI state, for example, based on the firstTCI state index being higher than the second TCI state index.

The determining/selecting the activated TCI state among the plurality ofactivated TCI states may be based on reception times of transport blocks(e.g., PDSCHs). The determining/selecting the activated TCI state amongthe plurality of activated TCI states may be based on reception times oftransport blocks (e.g., PDSCHs), for example, via the first BWP. Thewireless device may determine/select the activated TCI state of atransport block, among transport blocks, that the wireless devicereceives last (or latest or most recent). The wireless device mayreceive the transport block, for example, based on switching from thefirst BWP to the second BWP (e.g., before time T1 in FIG. 19 ). Thetransport block may be the last transport block received in the firstBWP. The transport block may be the last transport block received in thefirst BWP, for example, based on switching from the first BWP to thesecond BWP (e.g., before time T1 in FIG. 19 ).

The wireless device may receive a first transport block. The wirelessdevice may receive a first transport block, for example, at a firstreception time (e.g., at time T0 a in FIG. 19 ). The wireless device mayreceive the first transport block, for example, based on a first TCIstate. The wireless device may receive a second transport block. Thewireless device may receive a second transport block, for example, at asecond reception time (e.g., at time T0 b in FIG. 19 ). The wirelessdevice may receive the second transport block, for example, based on asecond TCI state.

The first reception time may be later (or more recent) than the secondreception time. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCIstate as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the first TCI state as the activated TCI state, forexample, based on the first reception time being later (or more recent)than the second reception time. The wireless device may determine/selectthe second TCI state as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state as the activated TCI state, forexample, based on the first reception time being later (or more recent)than the second reception time.

The first reception time may be earlier (or less recent) than the secondreception time. The wireless device may determine/select the first TCIstate as the activated TCI state. The wireless device maydetermine/select the first TCI state as the activated TCI state, forexample, based on the first reception time being earlier (or lessrecent) than the second reception time. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state as the activated TCI state. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state as theactivated TCI state, for example, based on the first reception timebeing earlier (or less recent) than the second reception time. Thewireless device may determine/select an activated TCI state among theplurality of activated TCI states for a CORESET in the one or moresecond CORESETs of the second BWP. The wireless device maydetermine/select an activated TCI state among the plurality of activatedTCI states for a CORESET in the one or more second CORESETs of thesecond BWP, for example, based on switching from the first BWP to thesecond BWP.

A first CORESET (e.g., CORESET 1 in FIG. 19 ), with a first TCI state,in the one or more first CORESETs may have a lowest (or highest) CORESETindex. A first CORESET (e.g., CORESET 1 in FIG. 19 ), with a first TCIstate, in the one or more first CORESETs may have a lowest (or highest)CORESET index, for example, among the CORESET indexes of the one or morefirst CORESETs. A third CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3 in FIG. 19 ) in the oneor more second CORESETs may have a lowest (or highest) CORESET index. Athird CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3 in FIG. 19 ) in the one or more secondCORESETs may have a lowest (or highest) CORESET index, for example,among CORESET indexes of the one or more second CORESETs. The wirelessdevice may determine/select the first TCI state of the first CORESET asthe activated TCI state for the third CORESET of the second BWP. Thewireless device may determine/select the first TCI state of the firstCORESET as the activated TCI state for the third CORESET of the secondBWP, for example, based on the first CORESET having the lowest (orhighest) CORESET index and second CORESET having the lowest (or highest)CORESET index.

A second CORESET (e.g., CORESET 2 in FIG. 19 ), with a second TCI state,in the one or more first CORESETs may have a second lowest (or highest)CORESET index. A second CORESET (e.g., CORESET 2 in FIG. 19 ), with asecond TCI state, in the one or more first CORESETs may have a secondlowest (or highest) CORESET index, for example, among the CORESETindexes of the one or more first CORESETs. A fourth CORESET (e.g.,CORESET 4 in FIG. 19 ) in the one or more second CORESETs may have asecond lowest (or highest) CORESET index. A fourth CORESET (e.g.,CORESET 4 in FIG. 19 ) in the one or more second CORESETs may have asecond lowest (or highest) CORESET index, for example, among CORESETindexes of the one or more second CORESETs. The wireless device maydetermine/select the second TCI state of the second CORESET as theactivated TCI state for the fourth CORESET of the second BWP. Thewireless device may determine/select the second TCI state of the secondCORESET as the activated TCI state for the fourth CORESET of the secondBWP, for example, based on the second CORESET having the second lowest(or highest) CORESET index and second CORESET having the second lowest(or highest) CORESET index.

A number of the one or more second CORESETs may be greater than anumber/quantity of the one or more first CORESETs. The one or more firstCORESETs may comprise a first CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESETindex and a second CORESET. The one or more first CORESETs may comprisea first CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESET index and a secondCORESET, for example, with a second lowest (or highest) CORESET indexamong the CORESET indexes of the one or more first CORESETs. The one ormore second CORESETs may comprise a third CORESET with a lowest (orhighest) CORESET index, a fourth CORESET with a second lowest (orhighest) CORESET index, and a fifth CORESET with a third lowest (orhighest) CORESET index among CORESET indexes of the one or more secondCORESETs. The wireless device may determine/select a first TCI state ofthe first CORESET as the activated TCI state for the third CORESET ofthe second BWP. The wireless device may determine/select a second TCIstate of the second CORESET as the activated TCI state for the fourthCORESET of the second BWP. The wireless device may determine/select thefirst TCI state of the first CORESET as the activated TCI state for thefifth CORESET of the second BWP.

A number of the one or more second CORESETs may be less than anumber/quantity of the one or more first CORESETs. The one or more firstCORESETs may comprise a first CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESETindex, a second CORESET with a second lowest (or highest) CORESET index,and a fifth CORESET with a third lowest (or highest) CORESET index amongthe CORESET indexes of the one or more first CORESETs. The one or moresecond CORESETs may comprise a third CORESET with a lowest (or highest)CORESET index and a fourth CORESET with a second lowest (or highest)CORESET index among CORESET indexes of the one or more second CORESETs.The wireless device may determine/select a first TCI state of the firstCORESET as the activated TCI state for the third CORESET of the secondBWP. The wireless device may determine/select a second TCI state of thesecond CORESET as the activated TCI state for the fourth CORESET of thesecond BWP.

The wireless device may determine that the one or more TCI states forthe second BWP comprise a TCI state (or one TCI state or a single TCIstate) for a CORESET among the one or more second CORESETs of the secondBWP. The wireless device may determine that the one or more TCI statesfor the second BWP comprise a TCI state (or one TCI state or a singleTCI state) for a CORESET among the one or more second CORESETs of thesecond BWP, for example, based on switching from the first BWP to thesecond BWP. The wireless device may determine/select the TCI state ofthe CORESET for the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP. Thewireless device may determine/select the TCI state of the CORESET forthe one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP, for example, based ondetermining that the one or more TCI states for the second BWP comprisethe TCI state (or one TCI state or a single TCI state) for the CORESET,

The CORESET may the third CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3 in FIG. 18 and FIG.19 ). The CORESET may the third CORESET (e.g., CORESET 3 in FIG. 18 andFIG. 19 ), for example, if the one or more third TCI states of the thirdCORESET comprise a TCI state (or one TCI state or a single TCI state).The TCI state may be TCI state 3 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 . The CORESETmay be the fourth CORESET (e.g., CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 ). TheCORESET may be the fourth CORESET (e.g., CORESET 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG.19 ), for example, if the one or more fourth TCI states of the fourthCORESET comprise a TCI state (or one TCI state or a single TCI state).The TCI state may be TCI state 4 in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 .

The wireless device may determine that the one or more TCI states forthe second BWP comprise a TCI state (or one TCI state or a single TCIstate) for a plurality of CORESETs among the one or more second CORESETsof the second BWP. The wireless device may determine that the one ormore TCI states for the second BWP comprise a TCI state (or one TCIstate or a single TCI state) for a plurality of CORESETs among the oneor more second CORESETs of the second BWP, for example, based onswitching from the first BWP to the second BWP. The wireless device mayselect/determine a CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESET indexamong CORESET indexes of the plurality of CORESETs. The wireless devicemay select/determine a CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESET indexamong CORESET indexes of the plurality of CORESETs, for example, basedon determining that the one or more TCI states for the second BWPcomprise a TCI state (or one TCI state or a single TCI state) for aplurality of CORESETs among the one or more second CORESETs of thesecond BWP. The wireless device may determine/select the TCI state ofthe CORESET for the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP. Thewireless device may determine/select the TCI state of the CORESET forthe one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP, for example, based onselecting/determining the CORESET with a lowest (or highest) CORESETindex among CORESET indexes of the plurality of CORESETs.

FIG. 20 shows an example of beam management. At step 2002, a wirelessdevice may receive one or more first activation commands. The one ormore first activation commands may activate a plurality of TCI statesfor one or more first CORESETs of a first BWP of a cell. At step 2004,the wireless device may switch from the first BWP to a second BWP of thecell. At step 2006, the wireless device may select/determine anactivated TCI state among the plurality of TCI states for one or moresecond CORESETs of the second BWP. The wireless device mayselect/determine an activated TCI state among the plurality of TCIstates for one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP, for example,based on switching from the first BWP to a second BWP of the cell. Atstep 2008, the wireless device may receive, via the one or more secondCORESETs, DCI. The wireless device may receive, via the one or moresecond CORESETs, DCI, for example, based on the activated TCI state.

A wireless device may receive one or more first activation commands. Theone or more first activation commands may activate a plurality of TCIstates for one or more first CORESETs in a first CORESET group of afirst BWP of a cell. The wireless device may switch from the first BWPto a second BWP of the cell. The wireless device may determine one ormore second CORESETs, among a plurality of CORESETs in the second BWP,that are in the first CORESET group. The wireless device may determineone or more second CORESETs, among a plurality of CORESETs in the secondBWP, that are in the first CORESET group, for example, based onswitching from the first BWP to a second BWP of the cell. The wirelessdevice may select/determine an activated TCI state among the pluralityof TCI states for the one or more second CORESETs of the second BWP. Thewireless device may receive, via the one or more second CORESETs, DCI.The wireless device may receive, via the one or more second CORESETs,DCI, for example, based on the activated TCI state.

FIG. 21 shows an example of a sounding reference signal (SRS)configuration. A wireless device may receive one or more messages. Thewireless device may receive the one or more messages from a basestation. The one or more messages may comprise one or more configurationparameters. The one or more configuration parameters may be for a cell.The cell may be a primary cell (PCell). The cell may be a secondary cell(SCell). The cell may be a secondary cell configured with PUCCH (e.g.,PUCCH SCell). The cell may be an unlicensed cell. The cell may be anunlicensed cell, for example, operating in an unlicensed band. The cellmay be a licensed cell. The cell may be a licensed cell, for example,operating in a licensed band. The cell may comprise a plurality of BWPs.The plurality of BWPs may comprise one or more uplink BWPs comprising anuplink BWP of the cell. The plurality of BWPs may comprise one or moredownlink BWPs comprising a downlink BWP of the cell.

A BWP of the plurality of BWPs may be in an active state or an inactivestate (e.g., in one of an active state and an inactive state). Thewireless device may monitor a downlink channel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI,CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for/via the downlink BWP. The wireless device maymonitor a downlink channel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH)on/for/via the downlink BWP, for example, in the active state of adownlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs. The wireless device mayreceive a PDSCH transmission on/via the downlink BWP. The wirelessdevice may receive a PDSCH transmission on/via the downlink BWP, forexample, in the active state of a downlink BWP of the one or moredownlink BWPs. The wireless device may not monitor a downlinkchannel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for the downlinkBWP. The wireless device may not monitor a downlink channel/signal(e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for the downlink BWP, for example,in the inactive state of a downlink BWP of the one or more downlinkBWPs. The wireless device may not receive a PDSCH transmission on/viathe downlink BWP. The wireless device may not receive a PDSCHtransmission on/via the downlink BWP, for example, in the inactive stateof a downlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an uplink signal/channel(e.g., PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via the uplink BWP. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an uplink signal/channel(e.g., PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via the uplink BWP, forexample, in the active state of an uplink BWP of the one or more uplinkBWPs. The wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an uplinksignal/channel (e.g., PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via theuplink BWP. The wireless device may not send (e.g., transmit) an uplinksignal/channel (e.g., PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via theuplink BWP, for example, in the inactive state of an uplink BWP of theone or more uplink BWPs.

The wireless device may activate the downlink BWP of the one or moredownlink BWPs of the cell. The activating the downlink BWP may comprisethat the wireless device sets the downlink BWP as an active downlink BWPof the cell. The activating the downlink BWP may comprise that thewireless device sets the downlink BWP in the active state. Theactivating the downlink BWP may comprise switching the downlink BWP fromthe inactive state to the active state.

The wireless device may activate the uplink BWP of the one or moreuplink BWPs of the cell. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise thatthe wireless device sets the uplink BWP as an active uplink BWP of thecell. The activating the uplink BWP may comprise that the wirelessdevice sets the uplink BWP in the active state. The activating theuplink BWP may comprise switching the uplink BWP from the inactive stateto the active state.

The one or more configuration parameters (e.g., Configuration parametersat time T0 in FIG. 21 ) may indicate one or more SRS resource sets forthe uplink BWP of the cell. The one or more SRS resource sets maycomprise an SRS resource set (e.g., SRS resource set in FIG. 21 ). TheSRS resource set may comprise a plurality of SRS resources (e.g., SRSresource 1, SRS resource 2, . . . , SRS resource K in FIG. 21 ).

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate SRS resource setindexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSetId)for the one or more SRS resource sets. Each SRS resource set of the oneor more SRS resource sets may be identified by a respective SRS resourceset index of the SRS resource set indexes. The SRS resource set may beidentified by an SRS resource set index of the SRS resource set indexes.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate SRS resourceindexes (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceId) forthe plurality of SRS resources in the SRS resource set. Each SRSresource of the plurality of SRS resources may be identified by arespective SRS resource index of the SRS resource indexes. A first SRSresource of the plurality of SRS resources may be identified by a firstSRS resource index of the SRS resource indexes. A second SRS resource ofthe plurality of SRS resources may be identified by a second SRSresource index of the SRS resource indexes.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate spatial relations(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo) for theplurality of SRS resources in the SRS resource set. Each SRS resource ofthe plurality of SRS resources may be configured/provided/indicated by arespective spatial relation of the spatial relations. A first SRSresource of the plurality of SRS resources may beconfigured/provided/indicated by a first spatial relation, of thespatial relations, indicating a first reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCHblock, CSI-RS, SRS). A second SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources may be configured/provided/indicated by a second spatialrelation, of the spatial relations, indicating a second referencesignal.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate SRS resource setusages (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter usage, for example,usage may be ‘beamManagement’, ‘codebook’, ‘non-codebook’,‘AntennaSwitching,’ and/or the like) for the one or more SRS resourcesets. Each SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may beidentified/configured/indicated by a respective SRS resource set usageof the SRS resource set usages. The SRS resource set may beidentified/configured/indicated by an SRS resource set usage (e.g.,‘beamManagement’, ‘codebook’, ‘non-codebook’, ‘AntennaSwitching,’ and/orthe like) of the SRS resource set usages.

The wireless device may receive an activation command (e.g., at time T1in FIG. 21 ). The activation command may be a MAC CE (e.g.,Semi-persistent SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, Aperiodic SRSActivation/Deactivation MAC CE, etc.). The activation command may beDCI. The activation command may be an RRC message (or signaling, e.g.,RRC reconfiguration message).

The activation command may comprise a field indicating/comprising a cellindex of the cell. The one or more configuration parameters may indicatethe cell index identifying the cell (e.g., by a higher layer parameterServCellIndex). The activation command may comprise a fieldindicating/comprising a BWP index of the uplink BWP. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the BWP indexidentifying/indicating the uplink BWP (e.g., by a higher layer parameterBWP-Id). The activation command may comprise a fieldindicating/comprising the SRS resource set index of the SRS resourceset. The activation command may indicate an SRS resource of theplurality of SRS resources in the SRS resource set. The activationcommand may comprise a field indicating/comprising an SRS resource indexof the SRS resource. The activation command may indicate a referencesignal (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS, SRS, etc.). The activation commandmay comprise a field indicating/comprising a reference signal index(e.g., SSB index, SRS-ResourceId, NZP CSI-RS resource index, CSI-RSindex) of (or identifying) the reference signal. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the reference signal index for thereference signal. The activation command may indicate the referencesignal for spatial relationship derivation for the SRS resource. Theactivation command may indicate the reference signal to update a spatialrelation of the SRS resource. The spatial relation may provide/indicatea spatial setting for transmission of an SRS via the SRS resource. Thewireless device may determine a spatial domain transmission filter. Thewireless device may determine a spatial domain transmission filter, forexample, for transmission of the SRS via the SRS resource. The wirelessdevice may determine a spatial domain transmission filter, for example,based on the reference signal.

The reference signal may be a downlink signal. The downlink signal maycomprise an SS/PBCH block. The downlink signal may comprise a CSI-RS(e.g., periodic CSI-RS, semi-persistent CSI-RS, aperiodic CSI-RS). Thedownlink signal may comprise a DM-RS (e.g., for PUCCH, PUSCH, etc.). Thewireless device may use a spatial domain receiving filter to receive thedownlink signal. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the SRS,via the SRS resource, with a spatial domain transmission filter that isthe same as the spatial domain receiving filter. The wireless device maysend (e.g., transmit) the SRS, via the SRS resource, with a spatialdomain transmission filter that is the same as the spatial domainreceiving filter, for example, based on the reference signal (e.g.,indicated by the spatial relation) being the downlink signal. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the SRS, via the SRS resource,with the spatial domain receiving filter. The wireless device may send(e.g., transmit) the SRS, via the SRS resource, with the spatial domainreceiving filter, for example, based on the reference signal (e.g.,indicated by the spatial relation) being the downlink signal.

The reference signal may be an uplink signal (e.g., periodic SRS,semi-persistent SRS, aperiodic SRS, DM-RS). The wireless device may usea spatial domain transmission filter to send (e.g., transmit) the uplinksignal. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the SRS, via theSRS resource, with a spatial domain transmission filter that is the sameas the spatial domain transmission filter used to send (e.g., transmit)the uplink signal. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) theSRS, via the SRS resource, with a spatial domain transmission filterthat is the same as the spatial domain transmission filter used to send(e.g., transmit) the uplink signal, for example, based on the referencesignal (e.g., indicated by the spatial relation) being the uplinksignal.

The SRS resource set usage of the SRS resource set may be antennaswitching (e.g., higher layer parameter usage=“antennaSwitching,” and/orthe like). The one or more configuration parameters may indicate antennaswitching for the SRS resource set usage of the SRS resource set. Thewireless device may determine that the SRS resource set usage of the SRSresource set is antenna switching. The wireless device may update aspatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resourceswith the reference signal indicated by the activation command. Thewireless device may update a spatial relation of each SRS resource ofthe plurality of SRS resources with the reference signal indicated bythe activation command, for example, based on determining that the SRSresource set usage of the SRS resource set is antenna switching. Thewireless device may update a respective spatial relation of each SRSresource of the plurality of SRS resources with the reference signalindicated by the activation command. The wireless device may update arespective spatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources with the reference signal indicated by the activation command,for example, based on determining that the SRS resource set usage of theSRS resource set is antenna switching.

The base station may not send (e.g., transmit) a separate activationcommand to update the respective spatial relation of each SRS resourceof the plurality of SRS resources. The base station may not send (e.g.,transmit) a separate activation command to update the respective spatialrelation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources, forexample, based on the wireless device updating the respective spatialrelation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources with thereference signal. The not sending (e.g., transmitting) a separateactivation command to update the respective spatial relation of each SRSresource of the plurality of SRS resources may save signaling overheadand exchange, leading to increased power saving and reduced interferenceto other cells and/or wireless devices.

The wireless device may determine the spatial domain transmissionfilter. The wireless device may determine the spatial domaintransmission filter, for example, for transmission of the SRS via theSRS resource. The wireless device may determine the spatial domaintransmission filter, for example, based on the reference signalindicated by the activation command. The updating the respective spatialrelation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources with thereference signal may comprise that the wireless device sends (e.g.,transmit) an SRS, via each SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources, with the spatial domain transmission filter. The updating therespective spatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources with the reference signal may comprise that the wirelessdevice sends (e.g., transmits) a respective SRS, via each SRS resourceof the plurality of SRS resources, with the spatial domain transmissionfilter that is determined based on the reference signal.

The updating the respective spatial relation of each SRS resource of theplurality of SRS resources with the reference signal may comprise thatthe reference signal overrides an initial reference signal in arespective spatial relation (e.g., configured by a higher layerparameter such as SpatialRelationInfo) of each SRS resource of theplurality of SRS resources. The plurality of SRS resources may comprisea first SRS resource with a first spatial relation indicating a firstreference signal. The plurality of SRS resources may comprise a secondSRS resource with a second spatial relation indicating a secondreference signal. The updating the respective spatial relation of eachSRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources with the reference signalmay comprise that the reference signal in the activation commandoverrides the first reference signal in the first spatial relation andthe second reference signal in the second spatial relation. The updatingthe respective spatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality ofSRS resources with the reference signal may comprise that the wirelessdevice replaces the first reference signal in the first spatial relationof the first SRS resource with the reference signal and the secondreference signal in the second spatial relation of the second SRSresource with the reference signal.

The SRS resource set usage of the SRS resource set may not be antennaswitching. The one or more configuration parameters may not indicateAntenna Switching for the SRS resource set usage of the SRS resourceset. The wireless device may determine that the SRS resource set usageof the SRS resource set is not Antenna Switching. The SRS resource setusage of the SRS resource set may be beam management (e.g., higher layerparameter usage=“beamManagement,” and/or the like). The SRS resource setusage of the SRS resource set may be codebook (e.g., higher layerparameter usage=“codebook,” and/or the like). The SRS resource set usageof the SRS resource set may be non-codebook (e.g., higher layerparameter usage=“nonCodebook,” and/or the like). The wireless device mayupdate the spatial relation of the SRS resource with the referencesignal indicated by the activation command. The wireless device mayupdate the spatial relation of the SRS resource with the referencesignal indicated by the activation command, for example, based ondetermining that the SRS resource set usage of the SRS resource set isnot antenna switching. The updating the spatial relation of the SRSresource with the reference signal may comprise that the wireless devicedetermines a spatial domain transmission filter. The updating thespatial relation of the SRS resource with the reference signal maycomprise that the wireless device determines a spatial domaintransmission filter, for example, for transmission of an SRS via the SRSresource. The updating the spatial relation of the SRS resource with thereference signal may comprise that the wireless device determines aspatial domain transmission filter, for example, based on the referencesignal indicated by the activation command. The wireless device may notupdate a spatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources, other than the SRS resource, with the reference signalindicated by the activation command. The wireless device may not updatea spatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources, other than the SRS resource, with the reference signalindicated by the activation command, for example, based on determiningthat the SRS resource set usage of the SRS resource set is not AntennaSwitching. The wireless device may not update a respective spatialrelation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources, otherthan the SRS resource, with the reference signal indicated by theactivation command. The wireless device may not update a respectivespatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources,other than the SRS resource, with the reference signal indicated by theactivation command, for example, based on determining that the SRSresource set usage of the SRS resource set is not Antenna Switching. Thewireless device may not update a spatial relation of a second SRSresource, of the plurality of SRS resources, different from the SRSresource, with the reference signal indicated by the activation command.The wireless device may not update a spatial relation of a second SRSresource, of the plurality of SRS resources, different from the SRSresource, with the reference signal indicated by the activation command,for example, based on determining that the SRS resource set usage of theSRS resource set is not antenna switching.

FIG. 22 shows an example of a sounding reference signal (SRS)configuration procedure. At step 2202, a wireless device may receive oneor more messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters for an SRS resource set. The SRS resource setmay comprise a plurality of SRS resources. At step 2204, the wirelessdevice may receive an activation command indicating a reference signalto update a spatial relation of an SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources.

At step 2206, the wireless device may determine whether the one or moreconfiguration parameters indicate antenna switching for an SRS resourceset usage. The wireless device may determine that the one or moreconfiguration parameters indicate antenna switching for an SRS resourceset usage (e.g., higher layer parameter usage=“antennaSwitching,” and/orthe like) of the SRS resource set. At step 2208, the wireless device mayupdate a spatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRSresources with the reference signal. The wireless device may update aspatial relation of each SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resourceswith the reference signal, for example, based on determining that theone or more configuration parameters indicate antenna switching for anSRS resource set usage (e.g., higher layer parameterusage=“antennaSwitching,” and/or the like) of the SRS resource set.

The wireless device may determine that the one or more configurationparameters do not indicate antenna switching for an SRS resource setusage (e.g., higher layer parameter usage=“codebook” or “nonCodebook” or“beamManagement,” and/or the like) of the SRS resource set. At step2210, the wireless device may update the spatial relation of the SRSresource with the reference signal. The wireless device may update thespatial relation of the SRS resource with the reference signal, forexample, based on determining that the one or more configurationparameters do not indicate antenna switching for an SRS resource setusage (e.g., higher layer parameter usage=“codebook” or “nonCodebook” or“beamManagement,” and/or the like) of the SRS resource set. The wirelessdevice may not update a spatial relation of a second SRS resource, ofthe plurality of SRS resources, different from the SRS resource with thereference signal. The wireless device may not update a spatial relationof a second SRS resource, of the plurality of SRS resources, differentfrom the SRS resource with the reference signal, for example, based ondetermining that the one or more configuration parameters do notindicate antenna switching for an SRS resource set usage (e.g., higherlayer parameter usage=“codebook” or “nonCodebook” or “beamManagement,”and/or the like) of the SRS resource set.

FIG. 23 shows an example of overlapping downlink signal reception by awireless device. A base station may determine to send (e.g., transmit) afirst DCI (e.g., DCI 1 in FIG. 23 ) scheduling a first transport block(e.g., PDSCH 1 in FIG. 23 ) for a cell. A base station may determine tosend (e.g., transmit) a first DCI (e.g., DCI 1 in FIG. 23 ) scheduling afirst transport block (e.g., PDSCH 1 in FIG. 23 ) for a cell, forexample, to a wireless device. The base station may (e.g., further)determine to send (e.g., transmit) a second DCI (e.g., DCI 2 in FIG. 23) scheduling a second transport block (e.g., PDSCH 2 in FIG. 23 ) forthe cell.

FIG. 24 shows an example of an overlapping downlink signal receptionprocedure. The overlapping downlink signal reception procedure may besimilar to the procedure described with respect to FIG. 23 . At step2402, a base station may send, and a wireless device may receive, via afirst CORESET with a first CORESET group index, first DCI scheduling afirst transport block for a cell. At step 2404, a base station may send,and a wireless device may receive, via a second CORESET with a secondCORESET group index, a second DCI scheduling a second TB for the cell.At step 2406, the wireless device (and/or the base station) maydetermine that the first transport block and the second transport blockoverlap (e.g., overlap in FIG. 23 ). The first transport block and thesecond transport block overlapping may comprise that the first transportblock and the second transport block overlap in time (e.g., in at leastone symbol, in at least one slot, in at least one mini-slot, at leastone frame, etc.). The first transport block and the second transportblock overlapping in time may comprise that the first transport blockand the second transport block partially overlap in time. The firsttransport block and the second transport block overlapping in time maycomprise the first transport block and the second transport block fullyoverlap in time.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI, for example, based ondetermining that the first transport block and the second transportblock overlap. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI,for example, via a first CORESET with a first CORESET group index (e.g.,CORESET group index 1 in FIG. 23 ). The base station may send (e.g.,transmit) the second DCI. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) thesecond DCI, for example, based on determining that the first transportblock and the second transport block overlap. The base station may send(e.g., transmit) the second DCI, for example, via a second CORESET witha second CORESET group index (e.g., CORESET group index 2 in FIG. 23 )that may be different from the first CORESET group index.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI, for example, based ondetermining that the first transport block and the second transportblock overlap. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI,for example, via a first CORESET in a first CORESET group (e.g., CORESETgroup 1 in FIG. 23 ). The base station may send (e.g., transmit) thesecond DCI. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the second DCI,for example, based on determining that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap. The base station may send (e.g.,transmit) the second DCI, for example, via a second CORESET in a secondCORESET group (e.g., CORESET group 2 in FIG. 23 ) that may be differentfrom the first CORESET group. The second CORESET group may be differentfrom the first CORESET group based on a first CORESET group index of thefirst CORESET group being different from a second CORESET group index ofthe second CORESET group.

A base station may determine to send (e.g., transmit) a first DCIscheduling a first transport block for a cell. A base station maydetermine to send (e.g., transmit) a first DCI scheduling a firsttransport block for a cell, for example, to a wireless device. The basestation may determine that the first transport block overlaps with asecond transport block scheduled for the cell. The second transportblock may be scheduled by a second DCI. The second transport block maybe scheduled by a second DCI, for example, that is sent (e.g.,transmitted) via a second CORESET. The second CORESET may beconfigured/identified with a second CORESET group index. A secondCORESET group may comprise the second CORESET. The base station may send(e.g., transmit), via the second CORESET, the second DCI scheduling thesecond transport block. The wireless device may receive the second DCIvia the second CORESET. The second transport block may be periodic(e.g., SPS PDSCH).

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI via a firstCORESET with a first CORESET group index that is different from thesecond CORESET group index. The base station may send (e.g., transmit)the first DCI via a first CORESET with a first CORESET group index thatis different from the second CORESET group index, for example, based ondetermining that the first transport block overlaps with the secondtransport block. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the firstDCI via a first CORESET in a first CORESET group that is different fromthe second CORESET group. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) thefirst DCI via a first CORESET in a first CORESET group that is differentfrom the second CORESET group, for example, based on determining thatthe first transport block overlaps with the second transport block. Thebase station may not send (e.g., transmit) the first DCI via a firstCORESET with a first CORESET group index that is the same as the secondCORESET group index. The base station may not send (e.g., transmit) thefirst DCI via a first CORESET with a first CORESET group index that isthe same as the second CORESET group index, for example, based ondetermining that the first transport block overlaps with the secondtransport block. The base station may not send (e.g., transmit) thefirst DCI via a first CORESET in a first CORESET group that is the sameas the second CORESET group. The base station may not send (e.g.,transmit) the first DCI via a first CORESET in a first CORESET groupthat is the same as the second CORESET group, for example, based ondetermining that the first transport block overlaps with the secondtransport block. The first transport block may be a PDSCH. The secondtransport block may be a PDSCH.

At step 2408, the wireless device may determine whether the firstCORESET group index and the second CORESET group index are the same. Thewireless device may receive the first DCI via the first CORESET. Thewireless device may receive the second DCI via the second CORESET. Atstep 2412, the wireless device may decode/receive the first transportblock and the second transport block. The wireless device maydecode/receive the first transport block and the second transport block,for example, based on receiving the first DCI via the first CORESET withthe first CORESET group index and the second DCI via the second CORESETwith the second CORESET group index that is different from the firstCORESET group index.

The wireless device may receive the first DCI via the first CORESET. Thewireless device may receive the second DCI via the second CORESET. Thewireless device may decode/receive the first transport block and thesecond transport block. The wireless device may decode/receive the firsttransport block and the second transport block, for example, based onreceiving the first DCI via the first CORESET in the first CORESET groupand the second DCI via the second CORESET in the second CORESET groupthat is different from the first CORESET group. The first transportblock may be a PUSCH. The second transport block may be a PUSCH.

The wireless device may receive the first DCI via the first CORESET. Thewireless device may receive the second DCI via the second CORESET. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the first transport block andthe second transport block. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the first transport block and the second transport block, forexample, based on receiving the first DCI via the first CORESET with thefirst CORESET group index and the second DCI via the second CORESET withthe second CORESET group index that is different from the first CORESETgroup index.

The wireless device may receive the first DCI via the first CORESET. Thewireless device may receive the second DCI via the second CORESET. Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) the first transport block andthe second transport block. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) the first transport block and the second transport block, forexample, based on receiving the first DCI via the first CORESET in thefirst CORESET group and the second DCI via the second CORESET in thesecond CORESET group that is different from the first CORESET group.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messagescomprising one or more configuration parameters. The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprising one or moreconfiguration parameters, for example, to the wireless device. The oneor more configuration parameters may indicate the first CORESET groupindex for the first CORESET. The one or more configuration parametersmay indicate the second CORESET group index for the second CORESET.

A wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one ormore configuration parameters. A wireless device may receive one or moremessages comprising one or more configuration parameters, for example,from a base station. The one or more configuration parameters mayindicate a plurality of CORESET groups comprising a first CORESET group(e.g., CORESET group 1 in FIG. 23 ) and a second CORESET group (e.g.,CORESET group 2 in FIG. 23 ).

Each CORESET in the first CORESET group may beidentified/configured/provided with a first CORESET group index (e.g.,CORESET group index 1 in FIG. 23 ). The one or more configurationparameters may indicate the first CORESET group index for the firstCORESET group (or for each CORESET in the first CORESET group). EachCORESET in the second CORESET group may beidentified/configured/provided with a second CORESET group index (e.g.,CORESET group index 2 in FIG. 23 ). The one or more configurationparameters may indicate the second CORESET group index for the secondCORESET group (or for each CORESET in the second CORESET group).

The wireless device may receive a first DCI (e.g., DCI 1 in FIG. 23 )scheduling a first transport block (e.g., PDSCH 1 in FIG. 23 ) for acell. The wireless device may receive the first DCI via a first CORESETin the first CORESET group (e.g., CORESET group 1 in FIG. 23 ). Thefirst CORESET may be identified/configured/provided with the firstCORESET group index (e.g., CORESET group index 1 in FIG. 23 ). Thewireless device may receive a second DCI (e.g., DCI 2 in FIG. 23 )scheduling a second transport block (e.g., PDSCH 2 in FIG. 23 ) for thecell. The wireless device may receive the second DCI via a secondCORESET.

The first CORESET group (e.g., CORESET group 1 in FIG. 23 ) may comprisethe second CORESET. The second CORESET may beidentified/configured/provided with a second CORESET group index that issame as the first CORESET group index (e.g., CORESET group index 1 inFIG. 23 ). The second CORESET may be identified/configured/provided witha second CORESET group index that is same as the first CORESET groupindex (e.g., CORESET group index 1 in FIG. 23 ), for example, based onthe first CORESET group comprising the second CORESET.

The first CORESET and the second CORESET may be the same. The firstCORESET and the second CORESET being the same may comprise that a firstCORESET index of the first CORESET and a second CORESET index of thesecond CORESET are the same. The first CORESET and the second CORESETmay be different. The first CORESET and the second CORESET beingdifferent may comprise that a first CORESET index of the first CORESETand a second CORESET index of the second CORESET are different.

As described above, at step 2406, the wireless device may determine thatthe first transport block and the second transport block overlap. Thewireless device may determine that the first CORESET group index and thesecond CORESET group index are the same. At step 2410, the wirelessdevice may drop/discard/not receive the first transport block and/or thesecond transport block. The wireless device may drop/discard/not receivethe first transport block and the second transport block, for example,based on determining that the first transport block and the secondtransport block overlap and the first CORESET group index and the secondCORESET group index are the same. The dropping/discarding/not receivingthe first transport block and the second transport block may comprisethat the wireless device does not decode/receive the first transportblock and the second transport block.

The wireless device may determine that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap. The wireless device may determine thatthe first CORESET group index and the second CORESET group index are thesame. The wireless device may drop/discard the first transport block andreceive the second transport block. The wireless device may drop/discardthe first transport block and receive the second transport block, forexample, based on determining that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap and the first CORESET group index and thesecond CORESET group index are the same. The dropping/discarding thefirst transport block may comprise that the wireless device does notdecode/receive the first transport block. The receiving the secondtransport block may comprise that the wireless device decodes the secondtransport block.

The wireless device may determine that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap. The wireless device may determine thatthe first CORESET group index and the second CORESET group index are thesame. The wireless device may drop/discard the second transport blockand receive the first transport block. The wireless device maydrop/discard the second transport block and receive the first transportblock, for example, based on determining that the first transport blockand the second transport block overlap and the first CORESET group indexand the second CORESET group index are the same. The dropping/discardingthe second transport block may comprise that the wireless device doesnot decode/receive the second transport block. The receiving the firsttransport block may comprise that the wireless device decodes the firsttransport block.

The wireless device may determine that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap. The wireless device may determine thatthe first CORESET group comprises the first CORESET and the secondCORESET. The wireless device may drop/discard the first transport blockand the second transport block. The wireless device may drop/discard thefirst transport block and the second transport block, for example, basedon determining that the first transport block and the second transportblock overlap and the first CORESET group comprises the first CORESETand the second CORESET. The wireless device may drop/discard the firsttransport block and receive the second transport block. The wirelessdevice may drop/discard the first transport block and receive the secondtransport block, for example, based on determining that the firsttransport block and the second transport block overlap and the firstCORESET group comprises the first CORESET and the second CORESET. Thewireless device may drop/discard the second transport block and receivethe first transport block. The wireless device may drop/discard thesecond transport block and receive the first transport block, forexample, based on determining that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap and the first CORESET group comprises thefirst CORESET and the second CORESET.

The second CORESET group (e.g., CORESET group 2 in FIG. 23 ) maycomprise the second CORESET. The second CORESET may beidentified/configured/provided with a second CORESET group index (e.g.,CORESET group index 2 in FIG. 23 ) that is different from the firstCORESET group index (e.g., CORESET group index 1 in FIG. 23 ). Thesecond CORESET may be identified/configured/provided with a secondCORESET group index (e.g., CORESET group index 2 in FIG. 23 ) that isdifferent from the first CORESET group index (e.g., CORESET group index1 in FIG. 23 ), for example, based on the second CORESET groupcomprising the second CORESET.

The wireless device may determine that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap (e.g., partially overlap in time or fullyoverlap in time). The wireless device may determine that the firstCORESET group index and the second CORESET group index are different.The wireless device may receive the first transport block and the secondtransport block. The wireless device may receive the first transportblock and the second transport block, for example, based on determiningthat the first transport block and the second transport block overlapand the first CORESET group index and the second CORESET group index aredifferent. The receiving the first transport block and the secondtransport block may comprise that the wireless device decodes the firsttransport block and the second transport block.

The receiving the first transport block and the second transport blockmay further depend on a capability of the wireless device. The wirelessdevice may receive the first transport block and the second transportblock. The wireless device may receive the first transport block and thesecond transport block, for example, based on the wireless device beingcapable of receiving a plurality of overlapping transport blocksscheduled for the same cell. The wireless device may not receive thefirst transport block and the second transport block. The wirelessdevice may not receive the first transport block and the secondtransport block, for example, based on the wireless device not beingcapable of receiving a plurality of overlapping transport blocksscheduled for the same cell.

The wireless device may determine that the first transport block and thesecond transport block overlap. The wireless device may determine thatthe first CORESET group comprising the first CORESET and the secondCORESET group comprising the second CORESET are different. The wirelessdevice may receive the first transport block and the second transportblock. The wireless device may receive the first transport block and thesecond transport block, for example, based on determining that the firsttransport block and the second transport block overlap and the firstCORESET group comprising the first CORESET and the second CORESET groupcomprising the second CORESET are different. The receiving the firsttransport block and the second transport block may comprise that thewireless device decodes the first transport block and the secondtransport block.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate a first CORESETgroup index for the first CORESET. The one or more configurationparameters may not indicate a second CORESET group index for the secondCORESET. The wireless device may add/include/group the first CORESET ina first CORESET group and add/include/group the second CORESET in asecond CORESET group that is different from the first CORESET group. Thewireless device may add/include/group the first CORESET in a firstCORESET group and add/include/group the second CORESET in a secondCORESET group that is different from the first CORESET group, forexample, based on the one or more configuration parameters indicatingthe first CORESET group index for the first CORESET and not indicatingthe second CORESET group index for the second CORESET.

A second cell that is different from the cell may comprise the firstCORESET group (e.g., cross-carrier scheduling). A second cell that isdifferent from the cell may comprise the second CORESET group (e.g.,cross-carrier scheduling). A second cell index of the second cell and acell index of the cell may be different. A second cell index of thesecond cell and a cell index of the cell may be different, for example,if the second cell is different from the cell.

A second cell that is same as the cell may comprise the first CORESETgroup (e.g., self-scheduling). A second cell that is same as the cellmay comprise the second CORESET (e.g., self-scheduling). A second cellindex of the second cell and a cell index of the cell may be the same. Asecond cell index of the second cell and a cell index of the cell may bethe same, for example, if the second cell is the same as the cell.

The cell may comprise the first CORESET (e.g., self-scheduling). Thecell may comprise the second CORESET (e.g., self-scheduling). A secondcell different from the cell may comprise the first CORESET (e.g.,cross-carrier scheduling). A second cell different from the cell maycomprise the second CORESET (e.g., cross-carrier scheduling). The firstDCI may be with a CRC scrambled by a first RNTI. The first RNTI (e.g.,1st RNTI in FIG. 23 ) may be C-RNTI. The first RNTI may be MCS C-RNTI.The second DCI may be with a CRC scrambled by a second RNTI (e.g., 2ndRNTI in FIG. 23 ). The second RNTI may be C-RNTI. The second RNTI may beCS-RNTI.

The cell may comprise a plurality of transmission and reception points(TRPs). The plurality of TRPs may comprise at least a first TRP and asecond TRP. The plurality of TRPs may comprise any quantity of TRPs. Thefirst TRP may send (e.g., transmit) a downlink signal/channel (e.g.,PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via a first CORESET group. Transmitting the downlinksignal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, DCI) via the first CORESET group maycomprise that the first TRP may send (e.g., transmit) the downlinksignal/channel via a CORESET among the first CORESET group. The firstTRP may not send (e.g., not transmit) a downlink signal/channel (e.g.,PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via a second CORESET group that is different from thefirst CORESET group. Not sending (e.g., not transmitting) the downlinksignal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via the second CORESET groupmay comprise that the first TRP may not send (e.g., not transmit) thedownlink signal/channel via a CORESET among the second CORESET group.The second TRP may send (e.g., transmit) a downlink signal/channel(e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via the second CORESET group. Sending (e.g.,transmitting) the downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, DCI) via thesecond CORESET group may comprise that the second TRP may send (e.g.,transmit) the downlink signal/channel via a CORESET among the secondCORESET group. The second TRP may not send (e.g., not transmit) adownlink signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, DCI) via the first CORESET group.Not sending (e.g., not transmitting) the downlink signal/channel (e.g.,PDCCH, DCI) via the first CORESET group may comprise that the second TRPmay not send (e.g., not transmit) the downlink signal/channel via aCORESET among the first CORESET group.

The one or more configuration parameters may indicate TRP indexes forthe plurality of TRPs. Each TRP of the plurality of TRPs may beidentified/indicated by a respective TRP index of the TRP indexes. Afirst TRP of the plurality of TRPs may be identified/indicated by afirst TRP index of the TRP indexes. A second TRP of the plurality ofTRPs may be identified/indicated by a second TRP index of the TRPindexes. The first TRP index may be equal to a first CORESET groupindex. The first TRP index and the first CORESET group index may be thesame. The first TRP index may comprise the first CORESET group index.The second TRP index may be equal to a second CORESET group index. Thesecond TRP index and the second CORESET group index may be the same. Thesecond TRP index may comprise the second CORESET group index.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may determine that a first physical downlink sharedchannel (PDSCH) transmission, associated with a first control resourceset (coreset) group index, overlaps in time with a second PDSCHtransmission associated with a second coreset group index. The wirelessdevice may receive the first PDSCH transmission. The wireless device maydetermine, based on the first coreset group index and the second coresetgroup index, whether to receive the second PDSCH transmission. Adetermination to receive the second PDSCH transmission may be based onthe first coreset group index and the second coreset group index beingdifferent values. The wireless device may also perform one or moreadditional operations. The wireless device may receive, based on thefirst coreset group index and the second coreset group index beingdifferent values, the second PDSCH transmission. The wireless device maysend an acknowledgement of reception of the first PDSCH transmission andthe second PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may not receive(e.g., drop), based on the first coreset group index and the secondcoreset group index being a same value, the second PDSCH transmission.The not receiving (e.g., dropping) the second PDSCH transmission maycomprise at least one of: discarding the second PDSCH transmission froma buffer; or refraining from decoding the second PDSCH transmission. Thefirst coreset group index and the second coreset group index may be thesame value. The receiving the first PDSCH transmission may be based on adetermination that the first PDSCH transmission has a higher prioritythan the second PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may not receive(e.g., drop) the second PDSCH transmission. The second PDSCHtransmission may be a semi-persistent PDSCH transmission. Thedetermining whether to receive the second PDSCH transmission may befurther based on a capability of the wireless device for simultaneousreception of at least two transmissions. The first PDSCH transmissionmay partially overlap in time with the second PDSCH transmission bypartially overlapping in time with the second PDSCH transmission in atleast one of: a symbol; a slot; or a subframe. The wireless device mayreceive, via a first coreset, first downlink control information (DCI)scheduling the first PDSCH transmission. The wireless device mayreceive, via a second coreset, second DCI scheduling the second PDSCHtransmission. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the first DCI may bescrambled by a first radio network temporary identifier (RNTI). A CRC ofthe second DCI may be scrambled by a second RNTI. The first RNTI maycomprise at least one of: a cell RNTI (C-RNTI), or a modulation codingscheme cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI). The second RNTI may comprise a configuredscheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI). The wireless device may determine that athird PDSCH transmission, scheduled via a third coreset associated witha third coreset group index, overlaps in time with a fourth PDSCHtransmission scheduled via a fourth coreset associated with a fourthcoreset group index. The wireless device may receive, based on the thirdcoreset group index and the fourth coreset group index being different,the third PDSCH transmission and the fourth PDSCH transmission. Thethird PDSCH transmission may overlap in time with the fourth PDSCHtransmission by partially overlapping in time with the fourth PDSCHtransmission. At least one of: the first PDSCH transmission may overlapin time with the second PDSCH transmission by fully overlapping in timewith the second PDSCH transmission; or the third PDSCH transmission mayoverlap in time with the fourth PDSCH transmission by fully overlappingin time with the fourth PDSCH transmission. The wireless device mayreceive one or more messages comprising one or more configurationparameters for a cell. The one or more configuration parameters mayindicate: the first coreset group index for a first coreset; and thesecond coreset group index for a second coreset. Systems, devices andmedia may be configured with the method. A wireless device may compriseone or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, whenexecuted, cause the wireless device to perform the described method,additional operations and/or include the additional elements. A systemmay comprise a wireless device configured to perform the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements;and a base station configured to send the first PDSCH transmission andthe second PDSCH transmission. A computer-readable medium may storeinstructions that, when executed, cause performance of the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may determine that a first physical downlink sharedchannel (PDSCH) transmission, associated with a first control resourceset (coreset) group index, overlaps in time with a second PDSCHtransmission associated with a second coreset group index. The wirelessdevice may receive the first PDSCH transmission. The wireless device mayreceive, based on a determination that the first coreset group index andthe second coreset group index are different, the second PDSCHtransmission. The wireless device may also perform one or moreadditional operations. The second PDSCH transmission may comprise asemi-persistent PDSCH transmission. The receiving the second PDSCHtransmission may be further based on a capability of the wireless devicefor simultaneous reception of at least two transmissions. The firstPDSCH transmission may partially overlap in time with the second PDSCHtransmission by partially overlapping in time with the second PDSCHtransmission in at least one of: a symbol; a slot; or a subframe. Thewireless device may receive, via a first coreset, first downlink controlinformation (DCI) scheduling the first PDSCH transmission. A cyclicredundancy check (CRC) of the first DCI may be scrambled by a firstradio network temporary identifier (RNTI). The wireless device mayreceive, via a second coreset, second DCI scheduling the second PDSCHtransmission. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambled by a second RNTI.The first RNTI may comprise at least one of: a cell RNTI (C-RNTI), or amodulation coding scheme cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI). The second RNTI maycomprise a configured scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI). The wireless device maysend an acknowledgement of reception of the first PDSCH transmission andthe second PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may determine that athird PDSCH transmission scheduled via a third coreset with a thirdcoreset group index overlaps in time with a fourth PDSCH transmissionscheduled via a fourth coreset with a fourth coreset group index. Thewireless device may receive, based on the third coreset group index andthe fourth coreset group index being different, the third PDSCHtransmission and the fourth PDSCH transmission. The third PDSCHtransmission may overlap in time with the fourth PDSCH transmission bypartially overlapping in time with the fourth PDSCH transmission. Atleast one of: the first PDSCH transmission may overlap in time with thesecond PDSCH transmission by fully overlapping in time with the secondPDSCH transmission; or the third PDSCH transmission may overlap in timewith the fourth PDSCH transmission by fully overlapping in time with thefourth PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may receive one or moremessages comprising one or more configuration parameters for a cell. Theone or more configuration parameters may indicate: the first coresetgroup index for a first coreset; and the second coreset group index fora second coreset. Systems, devices and media may be configured with themethod. A wireless device may comprise one or more processors; andmemory storing instructions that, when executed, cause the wirelessdevice to perform the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements. A system may comprise a wireless deviceconfigured to perform the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements; and a base station configured to sendthe first PDSCH transmission and the second PDSCH transmission. Acomputer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed,cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements.

A base station may perform a method comprising multiple operations. Thebase station may send, to a wireless device via a first control resourceset (coreset) associated with a first coreset group index, firstdownlink control information (DCI) scheduling a first physical downlinkshared channel (PDSCH) transmission. The base station may send, based ona capability of the wireless device and via a second coreset associatedwith a second coreset group index, second DCI scheduling a second PDSCHtransmission. The first PDSCH transmission may overlap in time with thesecond PDSCH transmission. The first coreset group index may bedifferent from the second coreset group index. The base station may sendthe first PDSCH transmission and the second PDSCH transmissionoverlapping in time. The base station may receive, from the wirelessdevice, an acknowledgement of reception of the first PDSCH transmissionand the second PDSCH transmission. The base station may also perform oneor more additional operations. The second PDSCH transmission may be asemi-persistent PDSCH transmission. The base station may receive, fromthe wireless device, an indication of the capability of the wirelessdevice. The capability may comprise a capability of the wireless devicefor simultaneous reception of at least two transmissions. The firstPDSCH transmission may partially overlap in time with the second PDSCHtransmission by partially overlapping in time with the second PDSCHtransmission in at least one of: a symbol; a slot; or a subframe. Acyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the first DCI may be scrambled by afirst radio network temporary identifier (RNTI). A CRC of the second DCImay be scrambled by a second RNTI. The first RNTI may comprise at leastone of: a cell RNTI (C-RNTI), or a modulation coding scheme cell RNTI(MCS-C-RNTI). The second RNTI may comprise a configured scheduling RNTI(CS-RNTI). A third PDSCH transmission may overlap in time with a fourthPDSCH transmission by partially overlapping in time with the fourthPDSCH transmission. At least one of: the first PDSCH transmission mayoverlap in time with the second PDSCH transmission by fully overlappingin time with the second PDSCH transmission; or a third PDSCHtransmission may overlap in time with a fourth PDSCH transmission byfully overlapping in time with the fourth PDSCH transmission. The basestation may send one or more messages comprising one or moreconfiguration parameters for a cell. The one or more configurationparameters may indicate: the first coreset group index for a firstcoreset; and the second coreset group index for a second coreset.Systems, devices and media may be configured with the method. A basestation may comprise one or more processors; and memory storinginstructions that, when executed, cause the base station to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements. A system may comprise a base station configured to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements; and a wireless device configured to send the acknowledgementof reception of the first PDSCH transmission and the second PDSCHtransmission. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that,when executed, cause performance of the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may determine that a physical downlink sharedchannel (PDSCH) transmission scheduled via a first control resource set(coreset) with a first coreset group index overlaps in time with asemi-persistent PDSCH transmission scheduled via a second coreset with asecond coreset group index. The wireless device may select, based on thefirst coreset group index and the second coreset group index being thesame, a selected PDSCH transmission among the semi-persistent PDSCHtransmission and the PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may receivethe selected PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may also performone or more additional operations. The wireless device may drop anunselected PDSCH transmission, among the semi-persistent PDSCHtransmission and the PDSCH transmission, that is different from theselected PDSCH transmission. The dropping the unselected PDSCHtransmission may comprise at least one of not receiving or decoding theunselected PDSCH transmission. The wireless device may determine that asecond PDSCH transmission scheduled via a third coreset with a thirdcoreset group index overlaps in time with a second semi-persistent PDSCHtransmission scheduled via a fourth coreset with a fourth coreset groupindex. The wireless device may receive, based on the third coreset groupindex and the fourth coreset group index being different, the secondsemi-persistent PDSCH transmission and the second PDSCH transmission.The receiving the second semi-persistent PDSCH transmission and thesecond PDSCH transmission may be further based on a capability of thewireless device on a simultaneous reception. The PDSCH transmission mayoverlap in time with the semi-persistent PDSCH transmission by partiallyoverlapping in time with the semi-persistent PDSCH transmission. ThePDSCH transmission may partially overlap in time with thesemi-persistent PDSCH transmission by partially overlapping in time withthe second PDSCH transmission in at least one of: a symbol; a slot; or asubframe. The wireless device may receive one or more messagescomprising one or more configuration parameters for a cell. The one ormore configuration parameters may indicate: the first coreset groupindex for the first coreset; and the second coreset group index for thesecond coreset. The wireless device may receive, via the first coreset,first downlink control information (DCI) scheduling the PDSCHtransmission for the cell. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the firstDCI may be scrambled by a first radio network temporary identifier(RNTI). The first RNTI may comprise at least one of: a cell RNTI(C-RNTI), or a modulation coding scheme cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI). Thewireless device may receive, via the second coreset, second DCIscheduling the semi-persistent PDSCH transmission for the cell. A CRC ofthe second DCI may be scrambled by a second RNTI. The second RNTI may bea configured scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI). Systems, devices and media maybe configured with the method. A wireless device may comprise one ormore processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed,cause the wireless device to perform the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements. A system may comprisea wireless device configured to perform the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements; and a base stationconfigured to send the semi-persistent PDSCH transmission and the PDSCHtransmission. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that,when executed, cause performance of the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements.

A base station may perform a method comprising multiple operations. Thebase station may determine to transmit a physical downlink sharedchannel (PDSCH) transmission in a time slot. The base station maytransmit, via a coreset with a first coreset group index and based ondetermining that the PDSCH transmission overlaps in the time slot with aperiodic semi-persistent PDSCH transmission associated with a secondcontrol resource set (coreset) group index, a downlink controlinformation (DCI) scheduling the PDSCH transmission. The first coresetgroup index may be different from the second coreset group index. Thebase station may transmit, in the time slot, the periodicsemi-persistent PDSCH transmission and the PDSCH transmission. The basestation may also perform one or more additional operations. The PDSCHtransmission may partially overlap in time with the periodicsemi-persistent PDSCH transmission by partially overlapping in the timeslot with the periodic semi-persistent PDSCH transmission in at leastone of: a symbol; a slot; or a subframe. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC)of the DCI may be scrambled by a radio network temporary identifier(RNTI). The RNTI may comprise at least one of: a cell RNTI (C-RNTI), ora modulation coding scheme cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI). The PDSCHtransmission may overlap in the time slot with the periodicsemi-persistent PDSCH transmission by partially overlapping in the timeslot with the periodic semi-persistent PDSCH transmission. The basestation may send one or more messages comprising one or moreconfiguration parameters for a cell. The one or more configurationparameters may indicate: the first coreset group index for the firstcoreset; and the second coreset group index for a second coreset.Systems, devices and media may be configured with the method. A basestation may comprise one or more processors; and memory storinginstructions that, when executed, cause the base station to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements. A system may comprise a base station configured to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements; and a wireless device configured to receive the periodicsemi-persistent PDSCH transmission and the PDSCH transmission. Acomputer-readable medium may store instructions that, when executed,cause performance of the described method, additional operations and/orinclude the additional elements.

A wireless device may perform a method comprising multiple operations.The wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one ormore configuration parameters indicating: a plurality of controlresource sets (coresets) of a first bandwidth part (BWP) of a cell; andone or more coresets for a second BWP of the cell. The wireless devicemay switch from the first BWP to the second BWP as an active BWP. Thewireless device may determine, for the one or more coresets, atransmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of a coreset among aplurality of TCI states of the plurality of coresets. The determiningmay be based on at least one of: the TCI state having a lowest orhighest TCI state index among a plurality of TCI state indexes of theplurality of TCI states; the coreset having a lowest coreset index amonga plurality of coreset indexes of the plurality of coresets; the coresetbeing associated with a most recent downlink control information (DCI)received prior to the switching; or the coreset being associated with asearch space set that is monitored last prior to the switching. Thewireless device may receive, via the one or more coresets, DCI based onthe TCI state. The wireless device may also perform one or moreadditional operations. The wireless device may monitor, via theplurality of coresets, second DCI based on the plurality of TCI states.Each TCI state of the plurality of TCI states may be associated with arespective coreset of the plurality of coresets. The wireless device mayreceive one or more first activation commands activating the pluralityof TCI states for the plurality of coresets. Each activation command ofthe one or more first activation commands may activate a respective TCIstate of the plurality of TCI states for a coreset of the plurality ofcoresets. The determining may be further based on receiving anactivation command, of the one or more first activation commands,indicating the TCI state the coreset in a reception time that is latestamong reception times of the one or more first activation commands. Thewireless device may determine a mapping between the coreset and the oneor more coresets. The determining the TCI of the coreset may be furtherbased on the determining the mapping. The determining the mapping may bebased on: a coreset index of the coreset; and one or more coresetindexes of the one or more coresets. The receiving the DCI based on theTCI state may be at least until receiving one or more second activationcommands activating one or more TCI states for the one or more coresets.The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the plurality ofTCI state indexes for the plurality of TCI states. Each TCI state of theplurality of TCI states may be identified with a respective TCI stateindex of the plurality of TCI states indexes. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the plurality of coreset indexesfor the plurality of coresets. Each coreset of the plurality of coresetsmay be indicated by a respective coreset index of the plurality ofcoreset indexes. The most recent DCI may be configured to schedule atransport block. The one or more configuration parameters may indicatethe coreset for the search space set. The TCI state may indicate areference signal. The receiving the DCI based on the TCI state maycomprise at least one demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) port of aphysical downlink control channel with the DCI being quasi co-locatedwith the reference signal. The at least one DM-RS port of the physicaldownlink control channel may be quasi co-located with the referencesignal based on a quasi co-location type. The TCI state may indicate aquasi co-location type. The first BWP may be a first active BWP of thecell. The switching may be based on at least one of: an expiry of an BWPinactivity timer; receiving a downlink information indicating the seconddownlink BWP; or initiating a random-access procedure. The wirelessdevice may monitor, via the one or more coresets, the DCI based on theTCI state. The receiving the DCI may be during the monitoring. Systems,devices and media may be configured with the method. A wireless devicemay comprise one or more processors; and memory storing instructionsthat, when executed, cause the wireless device to perform the describedmethod, additional operations and/or include the additional elements. Asystem may comprise a wireless device configured to perform thedescribed method, additional operations and/or include the additionalelements; and a base station configured to send the one or moremessages. A computer-readable medium may store instructions that, whenexecuted, cause performance of the described method, additionaloperations and/or include the additional elements.

One or more of the operations described herein may be conditional. Forexample, one or more operations may be performed if certain criteria aremet, such as in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment,a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteriamay be based on one or more conditions such as wireless device and/ornetwork node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packetsizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or thelike. If the one or more criteria are met, various examples may be used.It may be possible to implement any portion of the examples describedherein in any order and based on any condition.

A base station may communicate with one or more of wireless devices.Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies,and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices mayhave some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device categoryand/or capability(ies). A base station may comprise multiple sectors,cells, and/or portions of transmission entities. A base stationcommunicating with a plurality of wireless devices may refer to a basestation communicating with a subset of the total wireless devices in acoverage area. Wireless devices referred to herein may correspond to aplurality of wireless devices compatible with a given LTE, 5G, or other3GPP or non-3GPP release with a given capability and in a given sectorof a base station. A plurality of wireless devices may refer to aselected plurality of wireless devices, a subset of total wirelessdevices in a coverage area, and/or any group of wireless devices. Suchdevices may operate, function, and/or perform based on or according todrawings and/or descriptions herein, and/or the like. There may be aplurality of base stations and/or a plurality of wireless devices in acoverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, forexample, because those wireless devices and/or base stations may performbased on older releases of LTE, 5G, or other 3GPP or non-3GPPtechnology.

One or more parameters, fields, and/or information elements (IEs), maycomprise one or more information objects, values, and/or any otherinformation. An information object may comprise one or more otherobjects. At least some (or all) parameters, fields, IEs, and/or the likemay be used and can be interchangeable depending on the context. If ameaning or definition is given, such meaning or definition controls.

One or more elements in examples described herein may be implemented asmodules. A module may be an element that performs a defined functionand/or that has a defined interface to other elements. The modules maybe implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware,firmware, wetware (e.g., hardware with a biological element) or acombination thereof, all of which may be behaviorally equivalent. Forexample, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in acomputer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (suchas C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or amodeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, orLabVIEWMathScript. Additionally or alternatively, it may be possible toimplement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete orprogrammable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples ofprogrammable hardware may comprise: computers, microcontrollers,microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); fieldprogrammable gate arrays (FPGAs); and/or complex programmable logicdevices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and/or microprocessors maybe programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like.FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware descriptionlanguages (HDL), such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) orVerilog, which may configure connections between internal hardwaremodules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. Theabove-mentioned technologies may be used in combination to achieve theresult of a functional module.

One or more features described herein may be implemented in acomputer-usable data and/or computer-executable instructions, such as inone or more program modules, executed by one or more computers or otherdevices. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects,components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks orimplement particular abstract data types when executed by a processor ina computer or other data processing device. The computer executableinstructions may be stored on one or more computer readable media suchas a hard disk, optical disk, removable storage media, solid statememory, RAM, etc. The functionality of the program modules may becombined or distributed as desired. The functionality may be implementedin whole or in part in firmware or hardware equivalents such asintegrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), and thelike. Particular data structures may be used to more effectivelyimplement one or more features described herein, and such datastructures are contemplated within the scope of computer executableinstructions and computer-usable data described herein.

A non-transitory tangible computer readable media may compriseinstructions executable by one or more processors configured to causeoperations of multi-carrier communications described herein. An articleof manufacture may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readablemachine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon forenabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g., a wirelessdevice, wireless communicator, a wireless device, a base station, andthe like) to allow operation of multi-carrier communications describedherein. The device, or one or more devices such as in a system, mayinclude one or more processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like.Other examples may comprise communication networks comprising devicessuch as base stations, wireless devices or user equipment (wirelessdevice), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like. A network maycomprise any wireless technology, including but not limited to,cellular, wireless, WiFi, 4G, 5G, any generation of 3GPP or othercellular standard or recommendation, any non-3GPP network, wirelesslocal area networks, wireless personal area networks, wireless ad hocnetworks, wireless metropolitan area networks, wireless wide areanetworks, global area networks, satellite networks, space networks, andany other network using wireless communications. Any device (e.g., awireless device, a base station, or any other device) or combination ofdevices may be used to perform any combination of one or more of stepsdescribed herein, including, for example, any complementary step orsteps of one or more of the above steps.

Although examples are described above, features and/or steps of thoseexamples may be combined, divided, omitted, rearranged, revised, and/oraugmented in any desired manner. Various alterations, modifications, andimprovements will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Suchalterations, modifications, and improvements are intended to be part ofthis description, though not expressly stated herein, and are intendedto be within the spirit and scope of the descriptions herein.Accordingly, the foregoing description is by way of example only, and isnot limiting.

1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, first downlinkcontrol information (DCI) scheduling a downlink transmission associatedwith a first control resource set (CORESET) group index; receivingsecond DCI activating a scheduling configuration associated with asecond CORESET group index, wherein the downlink transmission overlapsin time with a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) transmission associatedwith the scheduling configuration; and receiving at least one of thedownlink transmission or the SPS transmission, wherein which of the atleast one of the downlink transmission or the SPS transmission isreceived is based on a comparison of the first CORESET group index andthe second CORESET group index.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein thereceiving the at least one of the downlink transmission or the SPStransmission comprises receiving the downlink transmission based on thefirst CORESET group index and the second CORESET group index being asame value.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein the receiving the at leastone of the downlink transmission or the SPS transmission comprises notreceiving the SPS transmission based on the first CORESET group indexand the second CORESET group index being a same value.
 4. The method ofclaim 3, wherein the not receiving the SPS transmission comprises atleast one of: discarding the SPS transmission from a buffer; orrefraining from decoding the SPS transmission.
 5. The method of claim 1,wherein the receiving the at least one of the downlink transmission orthe SPS transmission comprises receiving the downlink transmission andthe SPS transmission based on the first CORESET group index and thesecond CORESET group index being different values.
 6. The method ofclaim 5, wherein the receiving the downlink transmission and the SPStransmission further comprises receiving the downlink transmission afterreception of the SPS transmission.
 7. The method of claim 5, wherein thereceiving the downlink transmission and the SPS transmission furthercomprises receiving the downlink transmission before reception of theSPS transmission.
 8. The method of claim 1, wherein the downlinktransmission comprises a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)transmission.
 9. The method of claim 1, wherein the receiving the atleast one of the downlink transmission or the SPS transmission comprisesreceiving the downlink transmission based on prioritizing reception ofthe downlink transmission over the SPS transmission.
 10. A wirelessdevice comprising: one or more processors; and memory storinginstructions that, when executed by one or more processors, cause thewireless device to: receive first downlink control information (DCI)scheduling a downlink transmission associated with a first controlresource set (CORESET) group index; receive second DCI activating ascheduling configuration associated with a second CORESET group index,wherein the downlink transmission overlaps in time with asemi-persistent scheduling (SPS) transmission associated with thescheduling configuration; and receive at least one of the downlinktransmission or the SPS transmission, wherein which of the at least oneof the downlink transmission or the SPS transmission is received isbased on a comparison of the first CORESET group index and the secondCORESET group index.
 11. The wireless device of claim 10, wherein theinstructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to receive the at least one of the downlink transmissionor the SPS transmission by causing: receiving the downlink transmissionbased on the first CORESET group index and the second CORESET groupindex being a same value.
 12. The wireless device of claim 10, whereinthe instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to receive the at least one of the downlink transmissionor the SPS transmission by causing: not receiving the SPS transmissionbased on the first CORESET group index and the second CORESET groupindex being a same value.
 13. The wireless device of claim 12, whereinthe instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to not receive the SPS transmission by causing at leastone of: discarding the SPS transmission from a buffer; or refrainingfrom decoding the SPS transmission.
 14. The wireless device of claim 10,wherein the instructions, when executed by the one or more processors,cause the wireless device to receive the at least one of the downlinktransmission or the SPS transmission by causing: receiving the downlinktransmission and the SPS transmission based on the first CORESET groupindex and the second CORESET group index being different values.
 15. Thewireless device of claim 14, wherein the instructions, when executed bythe one or more processors, cause the wireless device to receive thedownlink transmission and the SPS transmission by further causing:receiving the downlink transmission after reception of the SPStransmission.
 16. The wireless device of claim 14, wherein theinstructions, when executed by the one or more processors, cause thewireless device to receive the downlink transmission and the SPStransmission by further causing: receiving the downlink transmissionbefore reception of the SPS transmission.
 17. The wireless device ofclaim 10, wherein the downlink transmission comprises a physicaldownlink shared channel (PDSCH) transmission.
 18. The wireless device ofclaim 10, wherein the instructions, when executed by the one or moreprocessors, cause the wireless device to receive the at least one of thedownlink transmission or the SPS transmission by causing: receiving thedownlink transmission based on prioritizing reception of the downlinktransmission over the SPS transmission.
 19. One or more non-transitorycomputer readable media storing instructions that, when executed cause:receiving first downlink control information (DCI) scheduling a downlinktransmission associated with a first control resource set (CORESET)group index; receiving second DCI activating a scheduling configurationassociated with a second CORESET group index, wherein the downlinktransmission overlaps in time with a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS)transmission associated with the scheduling configuration; and receivingat least one of the downlink transmission or the SPS transmission,wherein which of the at least one of the downlink transmission or theSPS transmission is received is based on a comparison of the firstCORESET group index and the second CORESET group index.
 20. The one ormore non-transitory computer readable media of claim 19, wherein theinstructions, when executed, further cause receiving the at least one ofthe downlink transmission or the SPS transmission by causing: receivingthe downlink transmission based on the first CORESET group index and thesecond CORESET group index being a same value.
 21. The one or morenon-transitory computer readable media of claim 19, wherein theinstructions, when executed, further cause receiving the at least one ofthe downlink transmission or the SPS transmission by causing: notreceiving the SPS transmission based on the first CORESET group indexand the second CORESET group index being a same value.
 22. The one ormore non-transitory computer readable media of claim 21, wherein theinstructions, when executed, further cause not receiving the SPStransmission by causing at least one of: discarding the SPS transmissionfrom a buffer; or refraining from decoding the SPS transmission.
 23. Theone or more non-transitory computer readable media of claim 19, whereinthe instructions, when executed, further cause receiving the at leastone of the downlink transmission or the SPS transmission by causing:receiving the downlink transmission and the SPS transmission based onthe first CORESET group index and the second CORESET group index beingdifferent values.
 24. The one or more non-transitory computer readablemedia of claim 23, wherein the instructions, when executed, furthercause receiving the downlink transmission and the SPS transmission bycausing: receiving the downlink transmission after reception of the SPStransmission.
 25. The one or more non-transitory computer readable mediaof claim 23, wherein the instructions, when executed, further causereceiving the downlink transmission and the SPS transmission by causing:receiving the downlink transmission before reception of the SPStransmission.
 26. The one or more non-transitory computer readable mediaof claim 19, wherein the downlink transmission comprises a physicaldownlink shared channel (PDSCH) transmission.
 27. The one or morenon-transitory computer readable media of claim 19, wherein theinstructions, when executed, further cause receiving the at least one ofthe downlink transmission or the SPS transmission by causing: receivingthe downlink transmission based on prioritizing reception of thedownlink transmission over the SPS transmission.